Moog Valves D637K - D639K Manual en

USER MANUAL FOR
DIRECT-OPERATED SERVO
AND PROPORTIONAL
VALVES WITH INTEGRATED
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
SERIES D637K AND D639K / SIZE 05
Rev. -, May 2012
SERVO AND PROPORTIONAL VALVES FOR ELECTROHYDRAULIC

POSITION, SPEED, PRESSURE AND FORCE CONTROL EVEN FOR HIGH
DYNAMIC REQUIREMENTS
Copyright
© 2012 Moog GmbH
Hanns-Klemm-Strasse 28
71034 Boeblingen (Germany)
Telephone: +49 7031 622-0
Fax: +49 7031 622-100
E-Mail: Info.germany@moog.com
Internet: http://www.moog.com/industrial
All rights reserved.

No part of this user manual may be reproduced in any form (print, photocopies, microfilm, or by any other
means) or edited, duplicated, or distributed with electronic systems without the prior written consent of Moog.
Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages.
Subject to change without notice.
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) A
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Index of Tables ......................................................................................................................................... vii
Index of Figures ........................................................................................................................................ vii
1 General Information ..................................................................................1

1.1 Notes on user manual ................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Subject to change without notice and validity................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Completeness ................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.3 Storage location ............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.4 Typographical conventions............................................................................................. 3
1.1.5 Structure of the warning notes ....................................................................................... 4
1.2 Supplemental documents ........................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Intended operation ...................................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel .................................................................................. 7
1.5 Structural modifications ............................................................................................................. 7
1.6 Environmental protection ........................................................................................................... 8
1.6.1 Acoustical Emissions...................................................................................................... 8
1.6.2 Disposal.......................................................................................................................... 9
1.7 Responsibilities ......................................................................................................................... 10
1.8 Warranty and liability ................................................................................................................ 11
1.9 Declaration of conformity ......................................................................................................... 12
1.10 Registered marks and trademarks........................................................................................... 13
2 Safety .......................................................................................................14
2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements................................................................. 14
2.2 Occupational safety and health ............................................................................................... 15
2.3 General safety instructions ...................................................................................................... 16
2.4 ESD ............................................................................................................................................. 16
2.5 Pressure limitation .................................................................................................................... 16
3 Product Description................................................................................17
3.1 Function and mode of operation.............................................................................................. 17
3.1.1 Operational modes ...................................................................................................... 17
3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve .......................................................................... 18
3.1.3 Permanent magnet linear force motor.......................................................................... 19
3.1.4 Valve electronics and valve software ........................................................................... 19
3.1.4.1 Valve status............................................................................................. 20
3.1.5 Signal interfaces........................................................................................................... 21
3.1.5.1 Connector X1 .......................................................................................... 22
3.1.5.2 Field bus connectors X3 and X4 ............................................................. 22
3.1.5.3 Service connector X10 ............................................................................ 23
3.2 Safety function/fail-safe ............................................................................................................ 24
3.2.1 Mechanical fail-safe function ........................................................................................ 25
3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe function F, D or M ................................................... 25
3.2.1.2 Mechanical fail-safe state........................................................................ 25
3.2.1.3 Fail-safe identification.............................................................................. 25
3.2.1.4 bushing-spool identification ..................................................................... 26
3.2.2 Electrical fail-safe function............................................................................................ 26
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) i
Table of Contents
3.2.3 Fail-safe events ............................................................................................................ 27

3.2.3.1 Shutdown/failure of the supply voltage.................................................... 27
3.2.3.2 Signals at the enable input ...................................................................... 28
3.2.3.3 Settable fault reaction.............................................................................. 28
3.2.3.4 Control commands .................................................................................. 29
3.2.4 Restarting the valve...................................................................................................... 30
3.3 Hydraulics .................................................................................................................................. 31
3.3.1 Operational modes ....................................................................................................... 31
3.3.1.1 Flow control (Q-control)........................................................................... 32
3.3.1.2 Pressure control (p-control)..................................................................... 32
3.3.1.3 Flow and pressure control (pQ-control)................................................... 34
3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols ................................................................ 35
3.3.2.1 4-way and 3-way operation ..................................................................... 35
3.3.2.2 2-way and 2x2-way operation ................................................................. 36
3.3.3 Leakage port Y ............................................................................................................. 36
3.3.3.1 Y identification ......................................................................................... 37
3.3.4 Electrical and hydraulic zero positions ......................................................................... 37
3.3.5 Notes on the pressure controller control response (D639K) ........................................ 38
3.4 Control........................................................................................................................................ 39
3.4.1 Signal types for analog command inputs ..................................................................... 40
3.4.1.1 Signal type identification.......................................................................... 41
3.4.1.2 Flow control command inputs.................................................................. 42
3.4.1.3 Pressure control command inputs........................................................... 45
3.4.2 Analog actual value outputs 4–20 mA.......................................................................... 48
3.4.2.1 Spool position actual value output........................................................... 48
3.4.2.2 Pressure actual value output................................................................... 48
3.4.3 Digital enable input....................................................................................................... 48
3.5 Valve software ........................................................................................................................... 49
3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software ..................................................................... 50
3.7 Nameplate .................................................................................................................................. 50
4 Characteristic curves..............................................................................51
4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)............................................................................................... 51
4.2 Flow signal characteristic curve .............................................................................................. 52
4.3 Pressure signal characteristic curves..................................................................................... 52
4.3.1 Valves with controlled spool position............................................................................ 52
4.3.2 Pressure control valves ................................................................................................ 53
4.4 Step response and frequency response ................................................................................ 54
5 Transportation and Storage ...................................................................58

5.1 Checking/unpacking a delivery ................................................................................................ 60
5.2 Scope of delivery of the valve .................................................................................................. 60
5.3 Storage ....................................................................................................................................... 60
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System............................61

6.1 Dimensions (installation drawings) ......................................................................................... 63
6.2 Mounting surface....................................................................................................................... 64
6.2.1 Surface quality.............................................................................................................. 64
6.2.2 Mounting pattern of mounting surface.......................................................................... 64
6.3 Mounting the valve .................................................................................................................... 65
6.3.1 Tools and materials required........................................................................................ 65
6.3.2 Specification for installation screws.............................................................................. 65
6.3.3 Procedure..................................................................................................................... 66
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) ii
Table of Contents
7 Electrical connection ..............................................................................68

7.1 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance ............................................................ 68
7.1.1 Protective grounding and electrical shielding ............................................................... 71
7.1.2 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software ........................................................... 72
7.2 Block diagram............................................................................................................................ 73
7.3 Arrangement of connectors ..................................................................................................... 74
7.4 Connector X1 ............................................................................................................................. 76
7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1................................................................................... 76
7.4.2 Mating connector for connector X1 .............................................................................. 76
7.4.3 Power supply................................................................................................................ 77
7.5 Analog inputs/outputs .............................................................................................................. 77
7.5.1 Analog inputs................................................................................................................ 77
7.5.1.1 Signal types............................................................................................. 78
7.5.2 Analog outputs ............................................................................................................. 80
7.6 Digital inputs/outputs................................................................................................................ 81
7.6.1 Digital inputs................................................................................................................ 81
7.6.2 Digital outputs............................................................................................................... 81
7.7 Digital signal interface .............................................................................................................. 82
7.7.1 SSI transducer.............................................................................................................. 82
7.7.1.1 Pin assignment SSI transducer connector X2......................................... 83
7.8 Field bus connectors X3 and X4 .............................................................................................. 84
7.8.1 CAN connectors ........................................................................................................... 84
7.8.1.1 Technical data for the CAN bus interface................................................ 84
7.8.1.2 Pin assignment, CAN connectors............................................................ 85
7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors ............................................................................................... 85
7.8.2.1 Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface........................................... 86
7.8.2.2 Pin assignment, Profibus-DP connectors................................................ 87
7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors ................................................................................................... 87
7.8.3.1 Technical data for the EtherCAT interface .............................................. 88
7.8.3.2 Pin assignment, EtherCAT connectors ................................................... 89
7.9 Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7.................................................................................. 90
7.9.1 Pin assignment, analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7 ............................................ 90
7.9.2 Signal types.................................................................................................................. 91
7.9.3 Input resistances .......................................................................................................... 92
7.10 Service connector X10 .............................................................................................................. 93
7.11 General notes on wiring............................................................................................................ 95
7.11.1 Tools and materials required........................................................................................ 95
7.11.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................... 96
7.11.3 Wiring supply cables and digital and analog signals .................................................... 96
7.12 Protective grounding and electrical shielding........................................................................ 97
7.12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 97
7.12.2 Equipotential bonding and protective grounding .......................................................... 98
7.12.2.1 General principles ................................................................................... 99
7.12.2.2 Protective conductor.............................................................................. 100
7.12.2.3 Ground loops......................................................................................... 100
7.12.3 Machines with deficient equipotential bonding ........................................................... 101
7.12.4 Electrical shielding...................................................................................................... 101
7.12.4.1 Cables ................................................................................................... 101
7.12.4.2 Connecting the shield............................................................................ 102
7.12.4.3 Insulated shielding................................................................................. 104
7.12.4.4 Cable routing ......................................................................................... 105
7.13 Permissible lengths for connection cables .......................................................................... 105
7.13.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 105
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) iii
Table of Contents
7.13.2 Typical values for copper cables ................................................................................ 105

7.13.2.1 Resistance of cable ............................................................................... 105
7.13.2.2 Capacitance of cable............................................................................. 105
7.13.3 24V supply cables ...................................................................................................... 106
7.13.3.1 Voltage drop per unit length .................................................................. 107
7.13.3.2 Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables ..................................... 107
7.13.4 Analog signal cables .................................................................................................. 108
7.13.5 Digital signal cables.................................................................................................... 109
7.13.5.1 Digital signal input cables...................................................................... 109
7.13.5.2 Digital signal output cables.................................................................... 109
7.13.5.3 Field bus cables .................................................................................... 109
7.14 Wiring connector X1................................................................................................................ 110
7.14.1 Single-ended command signals ................................................................................. 110
7.14.2 Conversion of actual value output signals Iout ............................................................ 111
7.14.2.1 Valves with 7-pin connector X1 ............................................................. 111
7.15 Wiring SSI transducers (X2) ................................................................................................... 112
7.15.1 SSI master mode........................................................................................................ 112
7.16 Wiring CAN networks .............................................................................................................. 113
7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections ..................................................................... 116
7.16.1.1 Suitable cable types for CAN networks ................................................. 116
7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus nodes ..................................................................... 117
7.16.3 CAN module address (node ID) ................................................................................. 117
7.16.4 CAN transmission rate ............................................................................................... 117
7.17 Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)................................................................................... 118
7.17.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections ..................................................................... 119
7.17.1.1 Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks ..................................... 120
7.17.2 Permissible number of Profibus nodes....................................................................... 120
7.17.3 Profibus-DP module address (node ID) ..................................................................... 120
7.17.4 Profibus-DP transmission rate.................................................................................... 120
7.18 Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4) ....................................................................................... 121
7.18.1 Suitable cable types for EtherCAT networks.............................................................. 122
7.18.2 Permissible number of EtherCAT nodes .................................................................... 123
7.18.3 EtherCAT module address (node ID) ......................................................................... 123
7.18.4 EtherCAT transmission rate ....................................................................................... 123
7.19 Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7) .......................................................................................... 124
7.20 Electrical start-up .................................................................................................................... 126
7.21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .................................................................................... 127
7.22 Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software ........................... 128
8 Start-up...................................................................................................130
8.1 Preparations............................................................................................................................. 135
8.2 Start-up of the valves .............................................................................................................. 136
8.3 Configuration of the valves .................................................................................................... 136
8.3.1 Configuration via the field bus interface ..................................................................... 137
8.3.1.1 Configuration with the machine controller ............................................. 137
8.3.1.2 Configuration with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software. 138
8.3.2 Configuration via the service interface ....................................................................... 139
8.3.3 Factory setting of the valves....................................................................................... 140
8.3.4 Storing of parameters................................................................................................. 140
8.4 Filling and flushing the hydraulic system ............................................................................. 141
8.5 Start-up of the hydraulic system............................................................................................ 142
8.5.1 Venting ....................................................................................................................... 142
8.5.1.1 Tool required ......................................................................................... 143
8.5.1.2 Venting the valve and the actuator........................................................ 143
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) iv
Table of Contents
9 Operation ...............................................................................................144
9.1 Preparations for operation ..................................................................................................... 147
9.2 Operation of the valve............................................................................................................. 148
9.3 Shutting down the valve ......................................................................................................... 149
10 Service ...................................................................................................151
10.1 Removing of the valves .......................................................................................................... 155
10.1.1 Tools and materials required...................................................................................... 155
10.1.2 Removing ................................................................................................................... 156
10.2 Maintenance............................................................................................................................. 156
10.2.1 Checking and replacing the port O-rings.................................................................... 157
10.2.1.1 Tools and materials required................................................................. 157
10.2.1.2 checking and replacing the O-rings....................................................... 157
10.2.2 Monitoring the pressure transducer drift..................................................................... 158
10.3 Trouble shooting ..................................................................................................................... 158
10.3.1 Leaks.......................................................................................................................... 159
10.3.1.1 Leak at the valve connecting surface .................................................... 159
10.3.1.2 Leak at the linear force motor screw plug ............................................. 159
10.3.1.3 Leak at the venting screw...................................................................... 159
10.3.2 No hydraulic response by the valve ........................................................................... 160
10.3.3 Instability of the external control loop ......................................................................... 161
10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops............................................................... 161
10.3.4.1 Flow control ........................................................................................... 161
10.3.4.2 Pressure control .................................................................................... 161
10.4 Repair ....................................................................................................................................... 162
11 Technical Data .......................................................................................164

11.1 Nameplates .............................................................................................................................. 165
11.1.1 Model number ............................................................................................................ 167
11.1.2 LSS address (Layer Setting Services) ....................................................................... 167
11.1.3 Data matrix code ........................................................................................................ 167
11.2 General technical data ............................................................................................................ 168
11.3 Hydraulic data.......................................................................................................................... 169
11.3.1 Pressure range identification...................................................................................... 170
11.4 Static and dynamic data ......................................................................................................... 170
11.5 Electrical data .......................................................................................................................... 171
11.5.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ......................................................................... 172
12 Accessories and spare parts................................................................173

12.1 Accessories ............................................................................................................................. 173
12.2 Spare parts............................................................................................................................... 175
12.3 Tools for valves in the D637K and D639K type series ......................................................... 175
13 Ordering Information ............................................................................176
14 Keyword index.......................................................................................178
15 Appendix................................................................................................190
15.1 Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters ............................................................... 190
15.2 Additional literature................................................................................................................. 192
15.2.1 Fundamentals of hydraulics ....................................................................................... 192
15.2.2 CAN fundamentals ..................................................................................................... 192
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) v
Table of Contents
15.2.3 Profibus fundamentals................................................................................................ 192

15.2.4 EtherCAT fundamentals ............................................................................................. 193
15.2.5 Moog publications ...................................................................................................... 193
15.3 Quoted standards .................................................................................................................... 193
15.3.1 CiA DSP ..................................................................................................................... 193
15.3.2 TIA/EIA ....................................................................................................................... 193
15.3.3 IEC ............................................................................................................................. 193
15.3.4 IEEE ........................................................................................................................... 193
15.3.5 ISO, ISO/IEC .............................................................................................................. 194
15.3.6 DIN ............................................................................................................................. 194
15.3.7 EN .............................................................................................................................. 194
15.3.8 EN ISO ....................................................................................................................... 195
15.3.9 ISO ............................................................................................................................. 196
15.4 Quoted directives .................................................................................................................... 196
15.5 Explosion-proof connectors................................................................................................... 196
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) vi
Index of Tables
Index of Tables
Tab. 1: Identification D637K-R/D639K-R ....................................................................................................... 5
Tab. 2: Identification D637K-P/D639K-P ....................................................................................................... 5
Tab. 3: Operational modes of the valves ..................................................................................................... 17
Tab. 4: Valve status ..................................................................................................................................... 20
Tab. 5: Existing interfaces............................................................................................................................ 21
Tab. 6: Spool ............................................................................................................................................... 25
Tab. 7: Specification for installation screws ................................................................................................. 65
Tab. 8: Allocation of interfaces to connectors .............................................................................................. 75
Tab. 9: Technical data for the CAN bus interface ........................................................................................ 84
Tab. 10: Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface ................................................................................... 86
Tab. 11: Technical data for the EtherCAT interface....................................................................................... 88
Tab. 12: Input resistances X5, X6, X7 ........................................................................................................... 92
Tab. 13: Benefits of the different signal types for analog inputs .................................................................... 96
Tab. 14: Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables as a function of the cable length for a
cable cross section of 0.75 m2 ....................................................................................................... 107
Tab. 15: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in CAN networks, depending on the
transmission rate ........................................................................................................................... 116
Tab. 16: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in CAN networks, depending on the cable
cross section and the number n of CAN bus nodes ...................................................................... 116
Tab. 17: Maximum permissible stub cable lengths in CAN networks .......................................................... 116
Tab. 18: Specification of electrical data for CAN bus cables ....................................................................... 116
Tab. 19: Suitable cable types for CAN networks ......................................................................................... 116
Tab. 20: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in Profibus-DP networks, depending on
the transmission rate ..................................................................................................................... 119
Tab. 21: Specification of electrical data for Profibus-DP cables (as per type A).......................................... 120
Tab. 22: Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks.............................................................................. 120
Tab. 23: Assignment of Ethernet/EtherCAT signals with mixed connector types ........................................ 122
Tab. 24: General technical data................................................................................................................... 168
Tab. 25: Hydraulic data................................................................................................................................ 169
Tab. 26: Pressure range identification in the type designation .................................................................... 170
Tab. 27: Static and dynamic data ................................................................................................................ 170
Tab. 28: Electrical data ................................................................................................................................ 171
Tab. 29: Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 173
Tab. 30: Spare parts .................................................................................................................................... 175
Tab. 31: Spare parts for valves in the D67XK type series ........................................................................... 175
Tab. 32: Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters ........................................................................... 190
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) vii
Index of Figures
Index of Figures
Fig. 1: Representative depiction of a direct drive servo valve .................................................................... 18
Fig. 2: Representative depiction of a permanent magnet linear force motor .............................................. 19
Fig. 3: Flow control (Q-control) block diagram............................................................................................ 32
Fig. 4: Pressure control (p-control) block diagram...................................................................................... 33
Fig. 5: Flow and pressure control (pQ-control) block diagram.................................................................... 34
Fig. 6: 4-way operation with mechanical fail-safe function M (hydraulic symbol) ....................................... 35
Fig. 9: 2x2-way operation with mechanical fail-safe function M (hydraulic symbol) ................................... 36
Fig. 10: Examples of the electrical and hydraulic zero positions of different spools in the flow signal
characteristic curve.......................................................................................................................... 37
Fig. 11: Differential flow control command input ±10 V (circuit and characteristic curve)............................. 42
Fig. 12: Differential flow control command input ±10 mA (circuit and characteristic curve).......................... 43
Fig. 13: Differential flow control command input 4–20 mA (circuit and characteristic curve)........................ 44
Fig. 14: Differential flow control command input 0–10 V (circuit and characteristic curve)........................... 45
Fig. 17: Flow diagram (4-way operation) ...................................................................................................... 51
Fig. 18: Flow signal characteristic curve with equal electrical and hydraulic zero positions......................... 52
Fig. 19: Design for measuring the flow signal characteristic curve............................................................... 52
Fig. 20: Pressure signal characteristic curve of the valves with controlled spool position and zero lap ....... 52
Fig. 21: Design for measuring the pressure signal characteristic curve on valves with controlled spool
position ............................................................................................................................................ 52
Fig. 22: Pressure characteristic curve of the pressure control valves .......................................................... 53
Fig. 23: Design for measuring the pressure signal characteristic curve on pressure control valves ............ 53
Fig. 24: Step response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 60 l/min (16 gpm) ..................................... 54
Fig. 25: Step response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 100 l/min (26 gpm) ................................... 54
Fig. 26: Step response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 80 l/min (26 gpm) ..................................... 55
Fig. 27: Frequency response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 60 l/min (16 gpm) ............................ 56
Fig. 28: Frequency response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 80 l/min with p=5 bar .................... 56
Fig. 29: Frequency response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 100 l/min (26 gpm) .......................... 57
Fig. 30: Installation drawing for valves with CAN bus interface (dimensions in mm).................................... 63
Fig. 31: Hole pattern of the mounting surface according to ISO 4401-05-05-0-05, dimensions in mm
and (in). ........................................................................................................................................... 64
Fig. 32: Block diagram of the valve electronics ............................................................................................ 73
Fig. 33: Arrangement of connectors on the valve electronics housing (maximum equipment specification) 74
Fig. 34: Pin assignment connector X1 (7-pin) p/Q valves............................................................................. 76
Fig. 35: Pin assignment connector X1 (7-pin) Q valves................................................................................ 76
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) vii
Index of Figures
Fig. 36: SSI transducer connector X2 (6+PE-pin) ........................................................................................ 83

Fig. 37: CAN connectors X3 and X4............................................................................................................ 85
Fig. 38: Profibus DP connectors X3 and X4 ................................................................................................. 87
Fig. 39: EtherCAT connectors X3 and X4 .................................................................................................... 89
Fig. 40: Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7......................................................................................... 90
Fig. 41: Equivalent circuit diagram of analog input ....................................................................................... 92
Fig. 42: Service connector X10 (M8, 3-pin) .................................................................................................. 93
Fig. 43: Equipotential bonding and protective grounding of machines (see also EN 60204-1) and
electrical shielding of our valves with integrated electronics ........................................................... 98
Fig. 44: Connecting the shield to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from fig. 43)...................................... 102
Fig. 45: Connecting the cable shield via connector to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from fig. 43)...... 103
Fig. 46: Connecting the insulated shielding to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from fig. 43) ................. 104
Fig. 47: Voltage drop on the supply cable .................................................................................................. 107
Fig. 48: Wiring of the 7-pin connector X1 Q valve ..................................................................................... 110
Fig. 49: Wiring of the 7-pin connector X1 pQ valve ................................................................................... 110
Fig. 50: Circuit for single-ended command signals..................................................................................... 110
Fig. 51: Circuit for converting the actual value output signals Iout (for valves with 7-pin connector X1) ..... 111
Fig. 52: Wiring diagram with SSI transducer .............................................................................................. 112
Fig. 53: Signals between valve and a 16-bit SSI transducer (example) ..................................................... 112
Fig. 54: CAN wiring diagram....................................................................................................................... 114
Fig. 55: Connection of the CAN bus valve with terminal resistor................................................................ 114
Fig. 56: Connection of the valve to a PC via the CAN bus interface (field bus connector X3) ................... 115
Fig. 57: Profibus-DP wiring diagram ........................................................................................................... 119
Fig. 58: Connection valve Profibus with terminal resistor ........................................................................... 119
Fig. 59: EtherCAT wiring diagram............................................................................................................... 122
Fig. 60: Twisted-pair litz wires in Ethernet/EtherCAT cables with M12 connectors.................................... 122
Fig. 61: Connecting a 2-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7 .................................... 125
Fig. 64: Connection of the valve to a PC via the service interface (service connector X10) ...................... 139
Fig. 65: MOOG Global Support Logo ......................................................................................................... 162
Fig. 66: Nameplate (example) .................................................................................................................... 165
Fig. 67: Ex nameplate (example)................................................................................................................ 166
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) viii
1 General Information Notes on user manual
1 General Information
1.1 Notes on user manual

This user manual refers exclusively to the standard models of the valves of the Notes on user manual
D637K/D639K type series. It includes the most important notes in order to op-
erate these valves properly and safely.
 Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
 Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements", page 14
Special models of the valves custom-made for specific customers,

such as valves with axis control function (ACV), are not explained
in this user manual.
Please contact Moog or one of its authorized service centers for
information on these special models.
The contents of this user manual and the product-related hardware and
software documentation relevant to the particular application must be read,
understood and followed in all points by each person responsible for machine
planning, assembly and operation before work with and on the valves is
started. This requirement applies in particular to the safety instructions.
 Chap. "1.1.2 Completeness", page 2
 Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel", page 7
 Chap. "1.7 Responsibilities", page 10
This user manual was created with great care and takes into account the appli-
cable regulations, the state of technology, as well as our many years of knowl-
edge and experience. The entire content has been formulated to the best of
our knowledge.
However, the possibility of error remains and improvements are possible.
Please feel free to submit any comments about possible errors and incomplete
information to us.
This user manual is also available in German.

On request, translation into other languages is possible.
1.1.1 Subject to change without notice and validity

The information contained in this user manual is valid and correct at the mo- Subject to change without
ment of release of this version of the user manual. The version number and re- notice and validity of
lease date of this user manual are indicated in the footer. the user manual
Changes may be made to this user manual at any time and without reasons
being given.
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D637K AND D639K (CDS29577-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 1
1.1.2 Completeness
This user manual is only complete in conjunction with the product-related hard- Completeness of
ware and software documentation required for the relevant application. the user manual
Available documentation:
 Chap. "1.2 Supplemental documents", page 5
1.1.3 Storage location

This user manual together with all the product-related hardware and software Storage location for
documentation relevant to the particular application must at all times be kept the user manual
close at hand to the valve or the higher-level machine.
1.1.4 Typographical conventions

Typographical
DANGER
conventions
warns about an immanent danger to health and life.
Failure to observe this warning can cause severe injuries or
even death.
 Make absolutely sure to heed the measures described to
prevent this danger
WARNING
warns about a possible situation dangerous to health.
Failure to observe this warning can cause severe injuries or
even death.
prevent this danger
CAUTION
warns about a possible situation dangerous to health.
Failure to observe this warning can cause slight injuries.
prevent this danger
CAUTION
warns about possible property and environmental damage.
Failure to observe this warning can cause damage to the
product, a machine or the environment.
prevent this danger
Identifies important notes that contain usage tips and special useful Important
information, but no warnings.
• or - Identifies listings
 Identifies an action that must be taken
 Identifies references to another chapter, another table or figure
"…" Denotes headings to the chapters or titles of the documents

to which reference is being made
Blue text Identifies hyperlinks
1., 2., … Identifies steps in a procedure that must be performed in

consecutive order
'...' Identifies parameters for valve software (e.g.: 'Node ID') or the
valve status (e.g.: 'ACTIVE')
1.1.5 Structure of the warning notes

In the present user manual, danger symbols draw attention to remaining dan-
gers in the handling of valves that cannot be constructively avoided. The ac-
tions for avoiding danger described must be adhered to.
The warning notes used are structured as follows:
Structure of warning
SIGNAL WORD
notes
Type of danger
Consequences
 Prevention
• Warning symbol: draws attention to the danger Explanation structure

• Signal word: indicates the severity of the danger of warning notes
- Meaning of the signal words:

 Chap. "1.1.4 Typographical conventions", page 3
• Type of danger: names the type and source of danger
• Consequences: describes the consequences in case of non-observance
• Prevention: specifies the actions to prevent this danger.
1 General Information Supplemental documents
1.2 Supplemental documents

The supplemental documents mentioned here are not included in Supplemental
the valves' scope of delivery. They are available as an accessory. documents
 Chap. "12 Accessories and spare parts", page 173
The PDF files of the supplemental documents can be downloaded
from the following link:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/literature
The following supplemental documents are available:

• Application notes "Technical Note TN 353"
Protective grounding and electrical shielding of hydraulic valves with inte-
grated electronics
1.3 Intended operation

The valves may be operated exclusively within the framework of Intended operation
the data and applications specified in the user manual.
Any other or more extensive use is not permitted.
The valves of the type series D637K/D639K are electrical operating resources
for areas subject to explosion, protection type "de" (d flameproof enclosure
according to IEC 60079-1, e increased safety according to IEC 60079-7).
Identification of type series D637K-R/D639K-R:
D637K-R/D639K-R II 2G Ex d e IIC TX Gb
TX Temperature environment Temperature hydraulic fluid
Sealing material: FKM T3 -20 °C 60 °C -20 °C 80 °C
T4 -20 °C 25 °C -20 °C 25 °C
Sealing material: HNBR T3 -20 °C 35 °C -20 °C 35 °C
T4 -20 °C 25 °C -20 °C 25 °C
Sealing material: T4 -40 °C -5 °C -40 °C -5 °C
T-ECOPUR
Temperature range
down to -40 °C on request
Tab. 1: Identification D637K-R/D639K-R
Identification type series D637K-P/D639K-P:
D637K-P/D639K-P II 2G Ex d e IIC TX Gb
TX Temperature environment Temperature hydraulic fluid
Sealing material: FKM T3 -20 °C 60 °C -20 °C 80 °C
T4 -20 °C 60 °C -20 °C 65 °C
T5 -20 °C 35 °C -20 °C 35 °C
Sealing material: HNBR T4 -20 °C 60 °C -20 °C 60 °C
T5 -20 °C 35 °C -20 °C 35 °C
Sealing material: T5 -40 °C 20 °C -40 °C 20 °C
T-ECOPUR
Temperature range
down to -40 °C on request
Tab. 2: Identification D637K-P/D639K-P
The valves may only be operated as a component part of a higher-level overall

system, for example in a machine.
1 General Information Intended operation
They may be used only as control elements to control flow and/or pressure in
hydraulic circuits that regulate position, speed, pressure and power.
The valves are intended for use with mineral-oil-based hydraulic oils. Use with
other media requires our prior approval.
Correct, reliable and safe operation of the valves requires qualified project
planning as well as proper utilization, transportation, storage, mounting,
removal, electric and hydraulic connection, start-up, configuration, operation,
cleaning and maintenance.
The valves may only be started up when the following is ensured:
• The higher-level machine with all its installed components complies with
the latest versions of the relevant national and international regulations,
standards and guidelines (such as, the EU Machinery Directive, the regu-
lations of the trade association and of TÜV or VDE).
• The valves and all the other installed components are in a technically
fault-free and operationally reliable state.
• No signals that can lead to uncontrolled movements in the machine are
transmitted to the valves.
Intended operation also includes the following:
• Observation of this user manual
• Handling of the valves in accordance with safety requirements
• Adherence to all the inspection and maintenance instructions of the manu-
facturer and the operator of the machine
• Observation of all product-related hardware and software documentation
relevant to the particular application
• Observation of all safety standards of the manufacturer and the operator
of the machine relevant to the particular application
• Observation of all the latest versions of the national and international
regulations, standards and guidelines relevant to the particular application
(such as, the EU Machinery Directive, the regulations of the trade associ-
ation and of TÜV or VDE)
1 General Information Selection and qualification of personnel
1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel

Selection and qualification
CAUTION
of personnel
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Working with and on the valves without the required basic
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical knowledge may cause
injuries or parts may be damaged.
 Only properly qualified and authorized users may work with
and on the valves.
  Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel",
page 7.
Maintenance work by the user on explosion proof valves is not

permitted. Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex
certification.
Qualified users are specialized personnel with the required knowledge and Qualified users
experience who have been trained to carry out such work. The specialized
personnel must be able to recognize and avert the dangers to which they are
exposed when working with and on the valves.
In particular, these specialized personnel must be authorized to operate,
earth/ground and mark hydraulic and electrical devices, systems and power
circuits in accordance with the standards of safety engineering. Project plan-
ners must be fully conversant with automation safety concepts.
Warranty and liability claims in the event of personal injury or damage to prop-
erty are among others excluded if such injury or damage is caused when the
valves are worked on or handled by non-qualified personnel.
 Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
1.5 Structural modifications

Structural modifications
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
The valves and the accessories can be damaged due to struc-
tural changes.
 Due to the complexity of the internal components, structural
changes to the valves and to the accessories may only be
made by MOOG GmbH or our authorized MOOG service
centers.
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous area.
 The additional painting of our explosion-proof valves
by third parties is a structural change. In case of additional
painting, due to the possible accumulation of electrostatic
charges, the corresponding provisions of the EN 60079-0
standard must be adhered to.
1 General Information Environmental protection
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous area:
 Structural modifications of the valves or to accessories may
only be made by MOOG GmbH or by an authorized MOOG
service center.
 Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex
certification.
Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage to property are
excluded if they are caused by unauthorized or improperly performed structural
modifications or other interventions.
 Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
1.6 Environmental protection

1.6.1 Acoustical Emissions
Environmental protection:
WARNING
Acoustical Emissions
Damage to hearing!
Depending on the application, significant levels of noise may be
generated when the valves are operated.
 Always protect yourself with hearing protection when
working on the valves.
Generally speaking, the valves do not generate harmful acoustical emissions

when they are used for their intended purpose.
1 General Information Environmental protection
1.6.2 Disposal
WARNING
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health, please
observe the following recommendations.
 Wear appropriate safety clothing.
 Wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
  Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
It is essential to comply with the relevant national waste disposal regulations Environmental
and environmental protection provisions when disposing of valves, spare parts protection: Disposal
or accessories, packaging that is no longer needed, hydraulic fluid or auxiliary
materials and substances used for cleaning!
If necessary, the items to be disposed of must be expertly dismantled into indi-
vidual parts, separated into individual materials and placed in the correspond-
ing waste system or earmarked for recycling.
The valve contains among others the following materials:
• Electronic components
• Adhesives and casting compounds
• Parts with electro-plated surfaces
• Permanent-magnet materials
• Hydraulic fluid
• Assorted metals and plastics
1 General Information Responsibilities
1.7 Responsibilities
The manufacturer and the operator of the machine are responsible for ensuring Responsibility of
that work with and on the valves and handling of the valves is planned and per- the manufacturer
formed in accordance with the directions given in this user manual and in the and the operator of
product-related hardware and software documentation relevant to the particu- the machine
lar application.
The manufacturer and the operator of the machine are in particular responsible
for ensuring the following:
• Selection and training of personnel
• Intended operation
• Handling in accordance with safety requirements
• Taking and monitoring of the occupational safety and health measures
required for the particular application
 Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
• Observation of all safety standards of the manufacturer and the operator
of the machine relevant to the particular application
• Observation of the latest versions of the relevant national and interna-
tional regulations, standards and guidelines (such as, the EU Machinery
Directive, the regulations of the trade association and of TÜV or VDE)
in the configuration, construction and operation of the machine with all its
installed components
• Installation of suitable safety devices for limiting the pressure at the
hydraulic ports
 Chap. "2.5 Pressure limitation", page 16
• Compliance with the preconditions for satisfying the EMC protection
requirements
 Chap. "11.5.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 172
• Use of the valves in a technically faultless and operationally safe state
• Prevention of unauthorized or improperly performed structural modifica-
tions, repairs or maintenance
 Chap. "1.5 Structural modifications", page 7
 Chap. "10 Service", page 151
• Definition and observation of the application-specific inspection and main-
tenance instructions
• Adherence to all the technical data relating to the storage, transportation,
installation, removal, connection, start-up, configuration, operation, clean-
ing, maintenance or elimination of any faults, in particular the ambient
conditions and the data pertaining to the hydraulic fluid used
 Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 164
• Proper storage, transportation, installation, removal, connection, start-up,
configuration, operation, cleaning, maintenance, elimination of any faults
or disposal
• Use of suitable and faultless accessories and of suitable and faultless
spare parts
• Handy and accessible storage of this user manual and of the product-re-
lated hardware and software documentation relevant to the particular ap-
plication
 Chap. "1.1.3 Storage location", page 2
1 General Information Warranty and liability
1.8 Warranty and liability

Our General Terms and Conditions of Sale and Payment always apply. These
are made available to the buyer at the latest on conclusion of the contract.
Among other things, warranty and liability claims for personal injury and dam- Exclusion of warranty
age to property are excluded if they are caused by one or more of the following: and liability
• Work with and on the valves carried out by or the valves handled by non-
qualified personnel
• Non-intended operation
• Handling not in accordance with safety requirements
• Omission of the occupational safety and health measures required for the
particular application
 Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
• Failure to observe this user manual or the product-related hardware and
software documentation relevant to the particular application
• Failure to observe the safety standards of the manufacturer and the oper-
ator of the machine relevant to the particular application
• Observation of the latest versions of the relevant national and interna-
tional regulations, standards and guidelines (such as, for example, the EU
Machinery Directive, the regulations of the trade association and of TÜV
or VDE) in the configuration, construction and operation of the machine
with all its installed components
• Omission of suitable safety devices for limiting the pressure at the hydraulic
ports
 Chap. "2.5 Pressure limitation", page 16
• Failure to comply with the preconditions for satisfying the EMC protection
requirements
• Use of the valves in a state that is not technically faultless or not opera-
tionally safe
• Unauthorized or improperly performed structural modifications, repairs or
maintenance
 Chap. "1.5 Structural modifications", page 7
 Chap. "10 Service", page 151
• Failure to adhere to the inspection and maintenance instructions of the
manufacturer and the operator of machine
• Failure to adhere to all the technical data relating to the storage, transpor-
tation, installation, removal, connection, start-up, configuration, operation,
cleaning, maintenance or elimination of any faults, in particular the ambi-
ent conditions and the data pertaining to the hydraulic fluid used
• Improper storage, transportation, installation, removal, connection, start-
up, configuration, operation, cleaning, maintenance, elimination of any
faults or disposal
• Use of unsuitable or defective accessories or of unsuitable or defective
spare parts
• Catastrophes caused by foreign objects or force majeure
1 General Information Declaration of conformity
1.9 Declaration of conformity

A declaration of conformity in accordance with the ATEX guideline for the con- Declaration of conformity
trol valves of the type series D637K/D639K has been created and is depicted
in this user manual.
1 General Information Registered marks and trademarks
1.10 Registered marks and trademarks

Moog and Moog Global Support® are registered trademarks of Moog Inc. and Registered marks
its subsidiaries. and trademarks
Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
the Microsoft® Corporation in the USA and/or other countries.
All the product and company names mentioned in this user manual
are possibly proprietary names or trademarks of the respective
manufacturers. The use of these names by third parties for their
own purposes may infringe the rights of the manufacturers.
The absence of the symbols ® or ™ does not indicate that the
name is free from trademark protection.
2 Safety Handling in accordance with safety requirements
2 Safety
2.1 Handling in accordance with safety

requirements
It is the responsibility of the manufacturer and the operator of the Handling in accordance
machine to ensure that the valves are handled in accordance with with safety requirements
safety requirements.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property due to
unexpected operation!
As in any electronic control system, the failure of certain com-
ponents in valves as well might lead to an uncontrolled and/or
unpredictable operational sequence.
 If automatic control technology is to be used, the user
should, in addition to all the potentially available standards
or guidelines on safety-engineering installations, consult the
manufacturers of the components used in great depth.
In order to ensure that the valves are handled in accordance with safety
requirements and operated without faults, it is essential to observe the following:
• All the safety instructions in the user manual
• All the safety instructions in the product-related hardware and software
documentation relevant to the particular application
• All the safety instructions in the safety standards of the manufacturer and
the operator of the machine relevant to the particular application
• All the relevant national and international safety and accident prevention
regulations, standards and guidelines, such as for example the safety reg-
ulations of the trade association, of TÜV or VDE, and the ATEX Directive
94/9/EC and ATEX Directive 1999/92/EC, in particular the following stan-
dards pertaining to the safety of machinery:
- EN ISO 12100
- EN 563
- EN 982
- EN 60204
- EN 60079-0
- EN 60079-1
- EN 60079-7
Observing the safety instructions and the safety and accident prevention regu-
lations, standards and guidelines will help to prevent accidents, malfunctions
and damage to property!
2 Safety Occupational safety and health
2.2 Occupational safety and health

Occupational safety
DANGER
and health measures
Risk of poisoning and injury! and equipment
Contact with hydraulic fluids can damage your health (e.g. eye
injuries, skin and tissue damage, poisoning in case of inhaling).
 If nevertheless hydraulic fluid gets into your eyes or on your
skin, consult a doctor immediately.
 When handling hydraulic fluids, observe the safety
provisions applicable to the hydraulic fluid used.
WARNING
Danger of injury due to falling objects!
Falling objects, such as valves, tools, or accessories can cause
injury.
 Wear appropriate safety clothing, e.g. safety shoes.
WARNING
Danger of burning!
Valves and hydraulic port lines can become very hot during
operation. Fingers and hands can suffer severe burn injuries
when touching the valve or the connector cable.
 Allow the valve and the connector cable to cool off before
contact.
 Wear appropriate safety clothing, e.g. safety gloves.
WARNING
Damage to hearing!
Depending on the application, significant levels of noise may be
generated when the valves are operated.
 Always protect yourself with hearing protection when
working on the valves.
2 Safety General safety instructions
2.3 General safety instructions

General safety
CAUTION
instructions
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the machine,
heed the following points:
 Values specified in the technical data must be adhered to.
 Values specified on the nameplate must be adhered to.
  Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 164
This user manual and the product-related hardware and software

documentation relevant to the particular application must be in-
serted in the machine's operating instructions.
2.4 ESD
ESD
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Electrical discharges can damage internal device components.
 Protect the valve, accessories and spare parts against static
charging. In particular, avoid touching the connector
contacts.
2.5 Pressure limitation

Safety devices for
WARNING
pressure limitation
The operation of the valves at pressure that is too high on the
hydraulic connections can cause injuries and damage to the
machine.
 Pressure-limiting valves or other comparable safety
devices, for example, must be installed to limit the pressure
at all the hydraulic ports to the specified maximum operating
pressure. Maximum operating pressure:
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
3 Product Description
3.1 Function and mode of operation

The valves of the D637K/D639K type series are direct operated servo valves or Function and mode
proportional valves (DDV: Direct Drive Valve). The valves are throttle valves for of operation
2-, 3-, 4- or even 2x2-way applications.
The valves are suitable for electrohydraulic position, speed, pressure and force
control even for high dynamic requirements. They control flow and/or control
pressure.
The valves of the D637K type series can be used for flow control.
The valves of the D639K type series can be used for pressure and pressure
limitation control and/or flow control.
The control electronics and a pressure transducer (only for D639K) are inte-
grated in the valve.
The valve electronics with a PWM driver end stage and a 24 V direct current
supply are integrated into the valve. The digital on-board electronics are in-
stalled in the electronic housing in vibration-decoupled design so that they are
not sensitive to shock and vibration.
3.1.1 Operational modes

Depending on the model, one of the operational modes below is preset in the
valve.
Selection between the operational modes is only possible in the D639K type
series valves with pQ-control and can be configured via the integrated service
or field bus interface.
Series Operational modes:

Q, p, pQ function
D637K D639K
Operational mode Q p pQ
Flow control (Q-control) 1 
 Chap. "3.3.1.1 Flow control (Q-control)", page 32
Pressure control (p-control) 1 
 Chap. "3.3.1.2 Pressure control (p-control)", page 32
Flow and pressure control (pQ-control) 1
 Chap. "3.3.1.3 Flow and pressure control (pQ-control)",
page 34
Tab. 3: Operational modes of the valves
1 Operational mode preset on delivery
3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
15
14
T A P B T1 Y
13 12 11 10
Item Designation Additional information

1 Analog input connectors X5…X7 The analog input connectors X5…X7 are optionally available.
2 Connector X2 for digital signal The X2 connector is optionally available.
interface
3 Service connector X10 The X10 service connector is only present for valves without CAN bus interface.
By default, the X10 service connector is not approved for use in areas subject to explo-
sion, however on request the valve can be equipped instead of the service connector
with a CAN bus interface that can be used in hazardous area.
Tightening torque: tighten the screw plug of the service connector with tightening
torque 9.5 Nm / 7 lbf ft!
 Chap. "7.10 Service connector X10", page 93
 Chap. "8.3.2 Configuration via the service interface", page 139
4 Connector X1  Chap. "7.4 Connector X1", page 76
5 Pressure transducer (LVDT) The pressure transducer is only provided on D639K type series valves.
 Chap. "3.3.1.2 Pressure control (p-control)", page 32
6 Venting screw The venting screw is only present for valves of the D639K type series.
 Chap. "8.5.1 Venting", page 142
7 Spool
8 Bushing Not required for valves D637K-P/D639K-P
9 Permanent magnet- linear force  Chap. "3.1.3 Permanent magnet linear force motor", page 19
motor
10 Ports  Chap. "6.2.2 Mounting pattern of mounting surface", page 64
11 Position transducer (LVDT)  Chap. "3.3.1.1 Flow control (Q-control)", page 32
12 Digital valve electronics  Chap. "3.1.4 Valve electronics and valve software", page 19
13 Fieldbus-X4 connector The field bus connectors X3 and X4 are only provided on valves with field bus
14 Fieldbus-X3 connector interfaces.
 Chap. "3.1.5.2 Field bus connectors X3 and X4", page 22
 Chap. "8.3.1 Configuration via the field bus interface", page 137
15 Ground terminal  Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding and electrical shielding"
Fig. 1: Representative depiction of a direct drive servo valve
3.1.3 Permanent magnet linear force motor
1 2 3 4 Representative depiction
5
of a permanent magnet
Item Designation
linear force motor
1 Bearing
2 Armature
3 Coil
4 Centering springs
5 screw plug
6
6 Permanent magnets
Fig. 2: Representative depiction of a permanent magnet linear force motor
A permanent magnet linear force motor (fig. 2 or item 9 in fig. 1) is used to Permanent magnet
drive the valve spool (item 7 in fig. 1). linear force motor
In contrast to proportional-solenoid drives, the permanent magnet linear force
motor can move the spool from the spring-set position in both working direc-
tions. This results in high actuating power for the spool while simultaneously
providing very good static and dynamic properties.
The permanent magnet linear force motor is a differential motor excited by
permanent magnets. Some of the magnetic force is already provided by the
permanent magnets. The linear force motor's power demand is thus signifi-
cantly lower than is the case with comparable proportional-magnet drives.
The linear force motor (item 6 fig. 2 or item 9 in fig. 1) bidirectionally drives the
valve spool (item 7 in fig. 1) stiffly against the centering springs (item 4 in
fig. 2). The high forces provided by this motor allow for precise spool move-
ment even when flow and frictional forces are present. The position of the
spool is then directly proportional to the coil current in the linear force motor.
When no coil current is present the spool is forced to a position determined
only by the centering springs. This de-energized position is configurable and
can be set at the factory.
3.1.4 Valve electronics and valve software

The digital drive and control electronics are integrated in the valve. Integrated digital valve
These valve electronics contain a microprocessor system that executes all the electronics and valve
important functions via the valve software it contains. The digital electronics software
enable valve control that is both precise and repeatable across the full working
range regardless of temperature.
The valve electronics can assume device- and drive-specific functions, such as
command signal ramps or dead band compensation.
This can relieve the strain on external machine control and if necessary field
bus communication.
 Chap. "3.5 Valve software", page 49
3.1.4.1 Valve status
CAUTION
The 'NOT READY' valve status is caused only by a serious,
non-rectifiable fault.
 If the 'NOT READY' valve status occurs, the valve must be
sent to MOOG GmbH or one of our authorized MOOG
service centers for inspection.
The valve's device status is referred to as the valve status. Valve status
The valve status can be set or interrogated via the service or field bus interface
in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for example
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
 Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software", page 50
Valve status Explanation

'ACTIVE' The valve is ready for operation and is in closed-loop control operation.
'HOLD' The valve is ready for operation and is in the electrical fail-safe state on
account of a control command.
The electrical fail-safe spool position is a closed loop parameterized
setting.
 Chap. "3.2.2 Electrical fail-safe function", page 26
'FAULT HOLD' The valve is ready for operation and is in the electrical fail-safe state on
account of a fault reaction.
The electrical fail-safe spool position is a closed loop parameterized
setting.
'DISABLED' The valve electronics are ready for operation and the valve is in
the mechanical fail-safe state on account of a control command.
 Chap. "3.2.1.2 Mechanical fail-safe state", page 25
Internal parameters can be set and interrogated.
The current to the permanent magnet linear force motor is switched off.
'FAULT DISABLED' The valve electronics are ready for operation and the valve is in
the mechanical fail-safe state on account of an error reaction.
Internal parameters can be set and interrogated.
The current to the permanent magnet linear force motor is switched off.
'INIT' The valve is switched off, is in the mechanical fail-safe state and can be
configured via the service or field bus interface.
'NOT READY' The valve is not ready for operation and is in the mechanical fail-safe
state on account of a serious non-rectifiable fault.
Tab. 4: Valve status
Fail-safe states and fail-safe events:

 Chap. "3.2.1 Mechanical fail-safe function", page 25
 Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 27
3.1.5 Signal interfaces

The valves have a connector, X1, with model-dependent analog and digital in-
puts/outputs. The connectors are an explosion-proof model.
 Chap. "3.1.5.1 Connector X1", page 22
Pin assignment of the connector X1:
 Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 76
WARNING
 For mounting and removal of the plug connectors as well
as operation of the valve, the notes and instructions in
the "Explosion-proof connectors eXLink, CEAG" operating
instructions must absolutely be adhered to.
Depending on the model, the valves can also have an isolated field bus interface
(connectors X3 and X4) and/or a service interface (service connector X10).
 Chap. "3.1.5.2 Field bus connectors X3 and X4", page 22
 Chap. "3.1.5.3 Service connector X10", page 23
For the standard model of the valve, the service interface is not
suitable for use in hazardous area. On request, the service inter-
face is available in an explosion-proof model.
Interfaces for activation

Interface signals
Field bus Service
Connector connectors connector
X1 X3 and X4 X10
Valves without field bus interface  - 1
Valves with CAN bus interface  1
Valves with Profibus interface   1
Valves with EtherCAT interface   1
Tab. 5: Existing interfaces
1 The valves can be started up and configured via the CAN bus or service interface with the Moog
Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
 Chap. "8.3.1.2 Configuration with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software",
page 138
It is necessary when ordering the valve to establish whether a field

bus interface is to be integrated and if necessary one of the above-
mentioned field bus interfaces is to be selected.
3.1.5.1 Connector X1
Valves without field bus interfaces must be commanded with an analog signal Valve Command
via connector X1.
Valves with field bus interfaces can be commanded with an analog signal via
connector X1 or with a digital signal via the field bus interface (connectors X3
and X4).
 Chap. "3.4 Control", page 39
Different signal types for analog command inputs for flow control can, depend- Analog command inputs
ing on the model, be selected in the valve.
 Chap. "3.4.1 Signal types for analog command inputs", page 40
The valves have an analog actual value output: Analog actual value
 Chap. "3.4.2 Analog actual value outputs 4–20 mA", page 48 output
The valves have a digital enable input: Enable input
 Chap. "3.4.3 Digital enable input", page 48
Pin assignment of connector X1:
3.1.5.2 Field bus connectors X3 and X4

Valves with CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via the CAN
bus interface (field bus connector X3) with the Moog Valve and Pump Configu-
ration Software.
 Chap. "8.3.1 Configuration via the field bus interface", page 137
To reduce the amount of wiring, the field bus interface is provided with two
connectors on the valve. The valves can thus be directly looped into the field
bus, i.e. without the use of external T-pieces.
The start-up, activation, monitoring, and configuration of the valves

via the field bus interface (connectors X3 and X4) with the Moog
Valve and Pump Configuration Software is only possible with CAN!
Valves with field bus interfaces are stared up, activated, monitored and config-
ured via the field bus interface (connectors X3 and X4).
 Chap. "8.3.1.2 Configuration with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software", page 138
Plug assignment of the field bus connectors X3 and X4:
 Chap. "7.8 Field bus connectors X3 and X4", page 84
3.1.5.3 Service connector X10
Valves without CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via the
service interface (service connector-X10) with the Moog Valve and Pump Con-
figuration Software.
 Chap. "8.3.2 Configuration via the service interface", page 139
WARNING
 In the standard model with a screw plug, the service
connector X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous area.
 When mounting the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the thread
of the screw plug as well as the thread in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
 In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
connector or the threads in the electronic housing, the valve
must not be operated in an hazardous area.
 Tightening torque for screw plug:
 Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
3.2 Safety function/fail-safe

CAUTION
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health during
safety-critical operation, please observe the following recom-
mendations.
  Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements", page 14
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health during
the design, building, and operation of the machine with all
installed components, please heed the following instructions.
 The manufacturer and operator of the machine are
responsible for making sure that for safety-critical use,
relevant safety standards in the latest version, which serve
to avoid damage, are heeded.
 It is vital among other things to ensure that both the
individual components and the complete machine can be
rendered in a safe state.
The valve fail-safe functions increase the safety of the user if, for example, Fail-safe functions
the valve supply voltage fails.
There are two different fail-safe functions: mechanical and electrical.
 Chap. "3.2.1 Mechanical fail-safe function", page 25
The valve can be rendered in the fail-safe state by different events.
The mechanical valve fail-safe state is denoted by the fact that the spool is in Mechanical fail-safe state
a defined spring-determined position.
The electrical valve fail-safe state is denoted by the fact that the valve is in Electrical fail-safe state
the 'HOLD' or 'FAULT HOLD' valve status and a preset command signal is
corrected by suitable positioning of the spool.
It is essential to ensure at the machine end that these fail-safe states result in
a safe state in the machine.
The valve must be restarted after it has adopted the fail-safe state.
 Chap. "3.2.4 Restarting the valve", page 30
3.2.1 Mechanical fail-safe function

The following fail-safe functions are available: Mechanical fail-safe
• Fail-safe function F functions
• Fail-safe function D
• Fail-safe function M
The fail-safe function must be specified when the valve is ordered.

To see which fail-safe function is integrated into the valve, see the
6th place in the type designation.
 Chap. "3.2.1.3 Fail-safe identification", page 25
3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe function F, D or M

In the case of the mechanical fail-safe functions F, D and M, the mechanical Fail-safe functions
setting of the linear force motor or corresponding centering springs at the F, D and M
factory establishes which position the spool assumes in the mechanical fail-
safe state.
Position of spool:  Tab. 6, page 25
3.2.1.2 Mechanical fail-safe state

The valve is in the mechanical fail-safe state when the spool is in a defined
spring-determined position.
Fail-safe Position of the spool in

function Position of spool the mechanical fail-safe
F Defined position of the spool: approx. 10 % valve opening: PB and AT state
D Defined position of the spool: approx. 10 % valve opening: PB and AT
M Defined overlapped center position of spool
The mechanical fail-safe function M gives rise in conjunction with spools that have
an overlap greater than ±10 %, i.e. in valves with bushing-spool identification D,
to the defined overlapped center position.
In the case of a smaller overlap, i.e. in valves with a different bushing-spool identifi-
cation, a defined overlapped center position is not possible.
 Chap. "3.2.1.4 bushing-spool identification", page 26
Tab. 6: Spool
3.2.1.3 Fail-safe identification

The fail-safe identification, i.e. the 6th position in the valve type designation, Fail-safe identification
indicates which mechanical fail-safe function is integrated in the valve.
Type designation: Chap. "3.7 Nameplate", page 50
Type designation:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
                  
fail-safe identification
Ident. Fail-safe function Additional information

F Valves with fail-safe function F  Tab. 6, page 25
 Chap. "3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe
D Valves with fail-safe function D
function F, D or M", page 25
M Valves with fail-safe function M
X Valves with special fail-safe function
3.2.1.4 bushing-spool identification

The bushing-spool identification, i.e. the 4th position in the valve type designa- Bushing-spool
tion, indicates which bushing-spool version is integrated in the valve. identification
Type designation:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
                  
bushing-spool identification
Valve
Ident. configuration Bushing-spool version
O 4-way Linear characteristic curve, zero lap
A 4-way Linear characteristic curve, ±1.5 % to ±3 % positive overlap
D 4-way Linear characteristic curve, ±10 % positive overlap
B 3-way Valve opening: PA and AT (only for D639K)
Z 2x2-way Valve opening: PA and BT (connect P with B and A with T
externally), with port Y only
X Special spool, on request
3.2.2 Electrical fail-safe function

After adopting the 'HOLD' or 'FAULT HOLD' valve status, the valve is in the Electrical fail-safe
electrical fail-safe state and a preset command signal is corrected by suitable function and electrical fail-
positioning of the spool. safe state
Depending on the operational mode set, the command signal is a flow control
and/or pressure control command signal.
The command signal can be set or interrogated via the service or field bus
interface in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for
example with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
Command signals that may be applied from an external source via the field bus
interface or the analog inputs are ignored in the 'HOLD' and 'FAULT HOLD'
valve states.
3.2.3 Fail-safe events
CAUTION
The valve is rendered in the fail-safe state in response to the fail-safe events Fail-safe events
set out below.
The valve must be restarted after it has adopted the fail-safe state.
Fail-safe
state Cause of adoption of fail-safe state
Mechan.
Settable
Electr.
External fault Control

Fail-safe event event reaction command
Shutdown/failure of the supply  
voltage
Signals on the enable input of   
the connector X11 (not possible
for p/Q function)
Adoption by 'HOLD'  
valve of valve
'FAULT HOLD'  
status
'DISABLED'  
'FAULT DISABLED'  
'INIT'  
'NOT READY'  
Serious,
non-rectifi-
able fault
1 Whether mechanical or electrical fail-safe function should be triggered must be selected on

order.
Valve status:  Chap. "3.1.4.1 Valve status", page 20
3.2.3.1 Shutdown/failure of the supply voltage
Fail-safe due to
CAUTION
shutdown/failure of
Risk of damage! the supply voltage
After the supply voltage to the valve is shut down, fails or drops
below 18 V, the linear force motor is no longer activated by the
valve electronics.
 The cause of the fault must be determined on the machine
side and if necessary, eliminated.
The valve is rendered in the mechanical fail-safe state when the supply voltage
is shut down or fails.
3.2.3.2 Signals at the enable input

Switching of the valve to fail-safe state can also be triggered by a correspond- Fail-safe due to signals
ing signal at the enable input of connector X1. Signals lower than 6.5 V at the at the enable input
enable input switch the valve to fail-safe state in the mechanical or electrical
fail-safe state depending on the model.
 Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1"
3.2.3.3 Settable fault reaction
CAUTION
Mechanical fail-safe state due to fault reaction Mechanical fail-safe state

The transition of the valve into the 'FAULT DISABLED' valve status and there- due to fault reaction
fore into the mechanical fail-safe state can be initiated by different event, such
as the supply voltage dropping below 18 V.
It is possible to set in the valve software the event for which the valve is
rendered in the 'FAULT DISABLED' valve status.
The fault reaction settings can be configured or interrogated via the service or
field bus interface in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be per-
formed for example with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
The transition of the valve into the 'NOT READY' valve status and therfore into
the mechanical fail-safe state is caused by a serious, non-rectifiable fault.
Electrical fail-safe state due to fault reaction Electrical fail-safe state

The transition of the valve into the 'FAULT HOLD' valve status and therefore due to fault reaction
into the electrical fail-safe state can be initiated by different events, such as
e.g. a fault in the electric cable
It is possible to set in the valve software the events for which the valve is ren-
dered in the 'FAULT HOLD' valve status.
The fault reaction settings can be configured or interrogated via the service or
field bus interface in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be per-
formed for example with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
3.2.3.4 Control commands

The transition of the valve of the 'HOLD', 'DISABLED' and 'INIT' valve states Control commands
can be initiated by a control command.
In the valve software, the valve can be put into the valve status 'HOLD,'
'DISABLED' or 'INIT.'
The valve state can be set or interrogated via the service or field bus interface
3.2.4 Restarting the valve

Restarting the valve
WARNING
Danger of injury due to unexpected machine movements!
In order to avoid injuries and other risks to health on start-up of
the valve after a transition into the fail-safe state, please follow
the following instructions.
 The cause of the fault must be determined on the machine
side and if necessary, eliminated.
 It is also necessary to ensure that restarting the valve does
not give rise to unintentional or dangerous states in the
machine.
After shutdown/failure of the supply voltage:

After the transition of the valve into a fail-safe state on account of a shut-
down/failure of the supply voltage to the valve, it will be necessary to restart the
valve by applying the supply voltage in accordance with the technical data.
If necessary, the valve must be returned to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
After application of an enable signal lower than 6.5 V:

After the transition of the valve into a fail-safe state on account of the applica-
tion of an enable signal lower than 6.5 V, it will be necessary to restart the
valve by applying an enable signal between 8.5 V and 32 V.
After transition of the valve into of the 'FAULT DISABLED' or

'FAULT HOLD' valve status:
After the transition of the valve into the fail-safe state on account of a transition
into the 'FAULT DISABLED' or 'FAULT HOLD' valve status, it can be restarted
as follows:
• Acknowledge the fault via the service or field bus interface and return the
valve to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• Set the supply voltage for at least 1 second under defined conditions to
zero and then restore the supply voltage in accordance with the technical
data. If necessary, the valve must be returned to the 'ACTIVE' valve
status.
After transition of the valve into the 'HOLD', 'DISABLED' or 'INIT' valve
status:
After the transition of the valve into the fail-safe state on account of adoption of
the 'HOLD', 'DISABLED' or 'INIT' valve status, it can be restarted as follows:
• Return the valve to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• Apply an enable signal less than 6.5 V, then apply an enable signal
between 8.5 V and 32 V and return the valve to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• For valves without field bus interface: set the supply voltage for at least
1 second under defined conditions to zero and then restore the supply
voltage in accordance with the technical data.
3 Product Description Hydraulics
3.3 Hydraulics
CAUTION
In order to ensure proper operation of the valves and of the
machine, heed the following:
 The correct configuration of the valve with regard to flow
and pressure is required.
3.3.1 Operational modes

Possible operational modes of the different Series:  Tab. 3, page 17
3.3.1.1 Flow control (Q-control)
Command position Q-function integrated into the valve Flow control (Q-function):
regulation of the position
of the spool
Demand value generator
Control
monitoring
Spool position controller
Actual position
Spool Position transducer (LVDT)
Fig. 3: Flow control (Q-control) block diagram
In this operational mode the position of the spool is controlled. The predefined
command signal corresponds to a particular spool position. The position of the
spool is proportional to the control signal.
The command signal (command position for the spool) is transmitted to the
valve electronics. The actual spool position is measured with a position trans-
ducer (LVDT) and transmitted to the valve electronics. Deviations between the
predefined command position and the measured actual position of the spool
are corrected. The valve electronics drive the linear force motor, which posi-
tions the spool accordingly. This process sets a specific flow.
The position command can be influenced by means of parameters in the valve
software (e.g., linearization, ramping, dead band, sectionally defined amplifica-
tion, correction of the zero position).
The parameters can be set or interrogated via the service or field bus interface
The flow rate to be set depends not only on the position of the spool, but also
on the pressure difference  p at the individual control lands.
 Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 51
 Chap. "4.2 Flow signal characteristic curve", page 52
3.3.1.2 Pressure control (p-control)
Faultless valve functioning for pressure control is only guaranteed

if the control loop is stable and the pressure in port T is lower than
the pressure to be controlled.
Command pressure p-function integrated into the valve Pressure control

(p-control): controlling
the pressure in the valve
port A
Control
monitoring
Pressure controller
Actual Actual
position pressure
Position transducer Pressure
Spool
(LVDT) sensor
Fig. 4: Pressure control (p-control) block diagram
In this operational mode the pressure in port A is controlled. The predefined

command signal corresponds to a particular pressure in port A.
The command signal (command pressure for port A) is transmitted to the valve
electronics. The pressure in port A is measured with a pressure transducer and
transmitted to the valve electronics as the actual pressure. Deviations between
the predefined command pressure and the pressure measured in port A are
corrected. The valve electronics drive the linear force motor, which positions
the spool accordingly. This process sets a specific flow, which results in a pres-
sure change in port A. The controlled pressure follows the command signal
proportionally.
The pressure command can be influenced by means of parameters in the valve
software (e.g., ramps, scaling, limitation).
The pressure controller is designed as an extended PID controller. The param-
eters of the PID controller and of the integrated pressure transducer can be set
or interrogated via the service or field bus interface in the valve software.
Setting and interrogation can be performed for example with the Moog Valve
and Pump Configuration Software.
 Chap. "3.3.5 Notes on the pressure controller control response (D639K)",
page 38
High pressure peaks in the hydraulic system can result in a drift of Monitoring the pressure
the valve's internal pressure transducer. transducer drift
To monitor any possible drift of the valve's pressure transducer,
we recommend that the pressure transducer be checked 3, 6 and
12 months after the valve is started up and thereafter at intervals of
6 months. This can be conducted for example using comparison
measurements with a calibrated pressure gauge. If necessary,
the internal pressure transducer must be recalibrated.
The pressure transducer can be influenced by means of parame-
ters in the valve software. The parameters can be set or interro-
gated via the service or field bus interface in the valve software.
Setting and query can, for example, take place with the Moog
3.3.1.3 Flow and pressure control (pQ-control)
pQ-function integrated Flow and pressure control

into the valve (pQ-control)
Command pressure Command position
Control
monitoring
Demand value
Pressure controller
generator
Minimum value formation
Control
monitoring
Actual Actual
pressure position
Pressure sensor Spool Position transducer (LVDT)
Fig. 5: Flow and pressure control (pQ-control) block diagram
This operational mode is a combination of flow and pressure control,

where both command signals, i.e. the command position for the spool and
the command pressure for port A, must be provided.
In pQ-control the position command calculated by the pressure controller is
compared with the position command applied from an external source.
The smaller of the two command signals is forwarded to the position control
loop.
The following combinations are for example possible:

• Flow control with superimposed pressure limitation control
• Forced changeover from one operational mode to the other
3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols

Depending on the model, the following valve configurations are possible: Valve configurations
• 2-way operation
 Chap. "3.3.2.2 2-way and 2x2-way operation", page 36
• 3-way operation
 Chap. "3.3.2.1 4-way and 3-way operation", page 35
• 4-way operation
 Chap. "3.3.2.1 4-way and 3-way operation", page 35
• 2x2-way operation
 Chap. "3.3.2.2 2-way and 2x2-way operation", page 36
3.3.2.1 4-way and 3-way operation

With 4-way operation the valves can be used to control the flow in ports A 4-way and 3-way
and B (used as throttle valves). operation
Port A or B must be sealed in order to obtain 3-way operation.
Leakage port Y must be used if the pressure in tank port T exceeds a value of
50 bar (725 psi).
 Chap. "3.3.3 Leakage port Y", page 36
The valves are available with zero lap (less than ±3 %) or ±10 % positive over-
lap.
Hydraulic symbols: 4-way

and 3-way operation
Fig. 6: 4-way operation with mechanical Fig. 7: 3-way operation with mechanical
fail-safe function M (hydraulic symbol) fail-safe function M (hydraulic symbol)
 Chap. "3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe function F, D or M", page 25
3.3.2.2 2-way and 2x2-way operation

With 2-way and 2x2-way operation the valves can be used to control the flow in 2-way and 2x2-way
one direction (used as throttle valves). operation
With 2x2-way operation the valve can be used in 2-way applications for greater
flows.
Ports P with B and A with T must externally be connected for this purpose.
The direction of flow must be observed as per fig. 9.
Leakage port Y must always be connected with 2x2-way operation.

 Chap. "3.3.3 Leakage port Y", page 36
Fig. 8: 2-way operation with mechanical Fig. 9: 2x2-way operation with mechanical
fail-safe function M (hydraulic symbol) fail-safe function M (hydraulic symbol)
 Chap. "3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe function F, D or M", page 25
3.3.3 Leakage port Y

Leakage port Y must be used in the following cases: Leakage port Y
• when the pressure pT in tank port T is greater than 50 bar (725 psi)
• with 2x2-way operation
The valve can be supplied either with or without leakage port Y.

It is necessary when ordering the valve to establish whether leak-
age port Y is to be used.
Whether leakage port Y is used can be ascertained from the
Y identification, i.e. the 7th position in the type designation.
 Chap. "3.3.3.1 Y identification", page 37
3.3.3.1 Y identification
The Y identification, i.e. the 7th position in the valve type designation, indicates Y identification
how leakage port Y is configured in the valve.
Type designation:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
                  
Y identification
Ident. Leakage port Y Can be used when

0 Closed, with screw plug Pressure in tank port pT  50 bar
(725 psi)
3 Open, with filter element Pressure in tank port pT  50 bar
(725 psi)
3.3.4 Electrical and hydraulic zero positions
The hydraulic zero position of the spool is not necessarily identical

to the electrical zero position.
The electrical zero position of the spool is set if the command signal input for Electrical and hydraulic
the spool position is equal to zero. zero positions of the spool
The hydraulic zero position is the position of the spool in which the pressures,
when the spool is symmetrical, are equal in the two sealed control ports.
The hydraulic zero position is model-dependent.
Spool with positive over-

Spool with zero lap lap
[%]
[%]
------------ [%]
Q-
Q-
-----------
-----------
QN
QN
QN
Q
Command signal [%] Command signal [%] Command signal [%]
Item Designation
1 Electrical zero position of the spool
2 Hydraulic zero position of the spool
3 Spool overlap
Fig. 10: Examples of the electrical and hydraulic zero positions of different spools in the flow signal
characteristic curve
3.3.5 Notes on the pressure controller control response (D639K)

The controlled system is essentially influenced by: Notes on the pressure
• Rated flow QN controller control
response (D639K)
• Actual pressure difference p per control land
• Load stiffness
• The fluid volume connected with port A and to be controlled
Depending on differences in machine construction (such as volume, pipework,

branching, accumulators.), different pressure controller configurations may be
required in pressure control.
The pressure controller configurations can be set or interrogated via the service
or field bus interface in the valve software.
Setting and interrogation can be performed for example with the Moog Valve
and Pump Configuration Software.
Up to 16 pressure controller configurations can be stored and activated during
operation.
3 Product Description Control
3.4 Control
Valves without field bus interfaces must be controlled with analog command Control of the valves
signals via connector X1.
Valves with field bus interfaces can be controlled either with analog command
signals via connector X1 or with digital signals via the field bus interface
(connectors X3 and X4).
DANGER
Danger!
Danger due to electric shock.
 Only use SELV/PELV power supplies to supply the valve.
3.4.1 Signal types for analog command inputs

Valves without field bus interfaces must be controlled with analog command Analog command inputs
signals via connector X1.
Different signal types for analog command inputs for flow or pressure control
can, depending on the model, be set in the valve.
The signal type can be set via the service or field bus interface in the valve
software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for example with the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
Signal types for Benefits of the different

command inputs Benefits signal types for analog
±10 V or 0–10 V Simple measurement of the signal, e.g. with an oscilloscope command inputs
±10 mA or 0–10 mA In contrast to the 4–20 mA signal type, less power is required with low
command signals;
large transmission lengths are possible
4–20 mA Detection of fault in the electrical line and large transmission lengths
are possible
It is necessary when ordering the valve to establish which signal

type for the analog command inputs is to be set in the valve on
delivery.
Which signal type has been set in the valve on delivery can be
ascertained from the signal type identification, i.e. the 10th position
in the type designation.
 Chap. "3.4.1.1 Signal type identification", page 41
Which signal type is currently set can be ascertained for example
All current and voltage inputs are differential, but can be connected
to ground (single-ended) by means of external wiring.
Basically, activation of the command inputs with differential signals is to be

preferred. If the command signal cannot be transmitted differentially, the refer-
ence point of the command input at the valve must be connected to ground
(GND).
 Chap. "7.14.1 Single-ended command signals", page 110
Because current inputs have a lower input resistance than voltage inputs and
are thererfore less prone to interference, a current signal is preferable to a volt-
age signal.

3.4.1.1 Signal type identification

The signal type identification, i.e. the 10th position in the valve type designa- Signal type
tion, indicates which signal type for the command inputs is set in the valve identification
when it is delivered.
Type designation:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
                  
signal type identification
Ident. Explanation
M Analog command signals via floating voltage inputs:
Flow control command input ±10 V and pressure control command input 0–10 V
Circuit and characteristic curve:  Fig. 11, page 42 and  Fig. 14, page 45
Pin assignment of connector X1: and
X Analog command signals via differential voltage inputs:
Flow control command input ±10 mA and pressure control command
input 0–10 mA
E Analog command signals via differential voltage inputs:
Flow control command input 4–20 mA and pressure control command
input 4–20 mA
9 Digital command signals via field bus interface
The type designation and the signal type for analog command
inputs on the nameplate indicate the valve's delivery status.
The signal type can be set via the service or field bus interface in
the valve software and therefore it is possible to change the valve
in such a way that it no longer conforms to this status.
3.4.1.2 Flow control command inputs
Signal type for the command input: ±10 V
Valve Differential flow control
Spool stroke [%]

command input ±10 V
Command signal [V]

Fig. 11: Differential flow control command input ±10 V (circuit and characteristic curve)
In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as a differential voltage
input with a ±10 V input range.
The spool stroke is proportional to the input voltage Uin.
UIn = 10 V 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PA and BT
UIn = 0 V Spool in electrical zero position
Uin = -10 V 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PB and AT
The differential input resistance RIn is 20 k.

The input resistance referenced to supply zero is approx. 150 k.
CAUTION
The potential difference of each input to GND must be between
-15 V and 32 V.
 Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
 Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
If there is no differential command input source available, the reference point of

the command inputs must be connected to 0 V of the command input source
(GND).
The operating direction of the command signal can be altered by modifying
the parameters of the valve software.
Signal type for the command input: ±10 mA
Differential flow control
Spool stroke [%]

Valve
command input ±10 mA
Command signal [mA]

Fig. 12: Differential flow control command input ±10 mA (circuit and characteristic curve)
input with a ±10 mA input range.
The input current to be measured IIn is directed via the two input pins to an in-
ternal shunt.
The spool stroke is proportional to the input current Iin.
IIn = 10 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PA and BT
IIn = 0 mA Spool in electrical zero position
Iin = - 10 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PB and AT
The differential input resistance RIn is 200 .

CAUTION
-15 V and 32 V.
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
The input current must be between -25 mA and 25 mA. Input
currents outside this permissible range will destroy the input.
If there is no differential command input source available, the reference point

of the command inputs must be connected to 0 V of the command input source
(GND).
The operating direction of the command signal can be altered by modifying the
parameters of the valve software.
Signal type for the command input: 4–20 mA
Differential flow control
Spool stroke [%]

Valve
command input 4–20 mA
Command signal [mA]

Fig. 13: Differential flow control command input 4–20 mA (circuit and characteristic curve)
input with a 4–20 V input range.
The input current to be measured IIn is directed via the two input pins to an
internal shunt.
The spool stroke is proportional to the input current Iin.
IIn = 20 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PA and BT
Iin = 12 mA Spool in electrical zero position
IIn = 4 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PB and AT

The input resistance referenced to supply zero GND is approx. 150 k.
CAUTION
In the signal range 4–20 mA input currents < 3 mA can cause
faulty reactions with digital valves.
 Examine the connection cables for defects.
CAUTION
-15 V and 32 V.
CAUTION

(GND).
The operating direction of the command signal can be altered by modifying the
parameters of the valve software.
3.4.1.3 Pressure control command inputs
Signal type for the command input: 0–10 V
Valve Differential pressure

control command
Pressure [%]
input 0–10 V
Command signal [V]

Fig. 14: Differential flow control command input 0–10 V (circuit and characteristic curve)
The pressure in control port A is proportional to the input voltage Uin.
UIn = 10 V 100 % pressure in control port A
UIn = 0 V 0 % pressure in control port A
The differential input resistance RIn is 20 k.

CAUTION
-15 V and 32 V.

(GND).

control command
Pressure [%]
input 0–10 mA
Command signal [mA]

input with a 0–10 mA input range.
internal shunt.
The pressure in control port A is proportional to the input current Iin.
IIn = 10 mA 100 % pressure in control port A

The input resistance referenced to GND is approx. 150 k.
CAUTION
-15 V and 32 V.
CAUTION

(GND).

control command
Pressure [%]
input 4–20 mA
Command signal [mA]

internal shunt.
The pressure in control port A is proportional to the input current Iin.

The input resistance referenced to GND is approx. 150 k.
CAUTION
CAUTION
-15 V and 32 V.
CAUTION

(GND).
3.4.2 Analog actual value outputs 4–20 mA

Depending on the model, the valve can have different analog actual value out- Analog actual value
puts for flow and/or pressure control. outputs
 Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 68
Conversion of actual value output signals Iout 4–20 mA into 2–10 V:
The reference point for the 4–20 mA analog actual value outputs is GND.
The load impedance RL must be in the range of 0–500 .
External detection of electrical cable faults can be realized with the

4–20 mA analog actual value outputs.
The 4–20 mA actual value outputs are short-circuit protected.
3.4.2.1 Spool position actual value output

The output current Iout is proportional to the spool position. Spool position actual
value output 4–20 mA
IOut = 20 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PA and BT
IOut = 12 mA Spool in electrical zero position
IOut = 4 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PB and AT
3.4.2.2 Pressure actual value output

The output current Iout is proportional to the pressure in control port A. Pressure actual value
output 4–20 mA
IOut = 20 mA 100 % pressure in control port A
IOut = 4 mA 0 % pressure in control port A
3.4.3 Digital enable input

The valves with p and q function have a digital enable input. Enable input
Switching of the valve to standby or fail-safe state can also be triggered by cor-
responding signals at the enable input of connector X1:
• Signals between 8.5 V and 32 V based on GND at the enable input switch
the valve to ACTIVE.
• Signals lower than 6.5 V at the enable input switch the valve to its me-
chanical or electrical fail-safe state depending on the model.
 Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1"
Fail-safe state of the valves:
 Chap. "3.2 Safety function/fail-safe", page 24
The input current of the digital enable input is 2.3 mA with connection of the
digital enable input to 24 V DC.
3 Product Description Valve software
3.5 Valve software

By changing the configuration of the software in the valve, the functionality of Valve software
the valve can be influenced.
 Chap. "8.3 Configuration of the valves", page 136
CAUTION
Risk of personal injuries!
In case of malfunctions of the valve due to incorrectly-
configured software, there is a danger due to uncontrolled
movements of the higher-level machine and destruction in the
area around the higher-level machine.
 When changing the configuration of the valve, make sure
that the functionality of the valve matches that described in
the operating instructions and the planned functionality.
The valve software is an integral part of the valve and cannot be altered, cop-
ied or replaced by the user.
Many of the functions made available by the valve software can be configured Configuration
by the user by modifying parameters. For this purpose, the desired parameters of the valves
must be transferred to the valve via the service or field bus interface. Parame-
ters can be modified by each field bus node, for example by the machine
controller.
If the valve is incorporated in a field bus, the parameters can be

transferred to the valve each time the system is powered up.
This ensures that the valve always receives the correct configura-
tion of the valve software.
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is available as an acces-

sory to simplify start-up, diagnosis and configuration of the valves.
3 Product Description Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration

Software
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is a Microsoft® Windows® Moog Valve and Pump
application enabling fast and convenient start-up, diagnosis and configuration Configuration Software
of the valves.
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software communicates with the
valves via the service or CAN bus interface. A PC with a suitable interface card
is required for this purposes.
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software offers the following func-
tions:
• Transfer of data between PC and valves
• Storage of the current valve settings on the PC
• Activation of the valves with graphic software control elements
• Graphic representation of status information, command signals and actual
values as well as characteristic curves for the valves
• Recording and visualization of the system parameters with the integrated
oscilloscope function
The Moog Valve Configuration Software is available as an accessory.

 Chap. "12.1 Accessories", page 173
3.7 Nameplate
See "Technical data": Nameplate
 Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", page 165
 Chap. "11.1.1 Model number", page 167
 Chap. "11.1.2 LSS address (Layer Setting Services)", page 167
 Chap. "11.1.3 Data matrix code", page 167
4 Characteristic curves Flow diagram (4-way operation)
4 Characteristic curves
4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)
Flow diagram
Rated pressure difference pN= 10 bar
(i. e. pN = 5 bar pro control land)
(4-way operation)
Flow Q [l/min]
Rated pressure difference pN= 70 bar

(i. e. pN = 35 bar pro control land)
200 Qmax = 180 l/min
150
100
in
80 I/m
60
60 in
50 0 I/m
10
40
in
30 I/m
60
20
15
10
8 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 350
Valve pressure difference p [bar]
Fig. 17: Flow diagram (4-way operation)
The flow rate to be set depends not only on the position of the spool, but also
on the pressure difference p at the individual control lands.
For a target value in flow control of 100 % there arises for the valves D637K-R Formula for calculating
and D639K-R with a rated pressure difference of pN = 35 bar per control land the flow Q
for the valves D637K-P and D639K-P pN = 5 bar per control land of the rated
flow QN. If the pressure difference is altered, so the flow Q also changes with
a constant command signal in accordance with the following formula:
p
Q = QN  --------------
p N
Q [l/min] : actual flow

QN [l/min] : rated flow
p : Actual pressure difference per control land
[bar/psi]
pN : Rated pressure difference pN = 35 bar per control land
[bar/psi]
To avoid cavitation, the flow speed of the actual flow Q, calculated

in this way, at ports (A, B, P, T, etc.) must not be too great.
In typical applications the maximum permissible flow speed is
30 m/s (approx. 100 ft/s).
 Chap. "3.3.1.1 Flow control (Q-control)", page 32
4 Characteristic curves Flow signal characteristic curve
4.2 Flow signal characteristic curve

Flow signal characteristic
------------ [%]
curve
QN
Q
Command signal [%]
Fig. 18: Flow signal characteristic curve with Fig. 19: Design for measuring the flow signal
equal electrical and hydraulic zero positions characteristic curve
4.3 Pressure signal characteristic curves1

4.3.1 Valves with controlled spool position
Pressure signal
[%]
characteristic curve of
-----------------
p AB
the valves with controlled

pP
spool position and zero

lap
Command signal [%]
Fig. 20: Pressure signal characteristic curve of Fig. 21: Design for measuring the pressure
the valves with controlled spool position and signal characteristic curve on valves with
zero lap controlled spool position
1 Typical characteristic curve

(measured at operating pressure pP = 140 bar, viscosity of the hydraulic
fluid  = 32 mm2/s and temperature of the hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C)
4 Characteristic curves Pressure signal characteristic curves
4.3.2 Pressure control valves

Pressure characteristic
- [%]
curve of the pressure

---------
pN
pA
control valves
Command signal [%]
Fig. 22: Pressure characteristic curve of Fig. 23: Design for measuring the pressure
the pressure control valves signal characteristic curve on pressure
control valves
4 Characteristic curves Step response and frequency response
4.4 Step response and frequency response 1
Step response
Spool stroke [%]
of the spool stroke

(D637K-R)
Time [ms]
Fig. 24: Step response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 60 l/min (16 gpm)
Step response
Spool stroke [%]
of the spool stroke

(D637K-R)
Time [ms]
1 Typical characteristic curve

(measured at operating pressure pP = 140 bar, viscosity of the hydraulic
fluid  = 32 mm2/s and temperature of the hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C)
Step response
Spool stroke [%]
100
of the spool stroke
(D637K-P/D639K-P)
75
50
25
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Time [ms]
frequency response
Amplitude ratio [dB]
of the spool stroke
Phase lag [degrees]

Frequency [Hz]
Fig. 27: Frequency response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 60 l/min (16 gpm)
-3 ± 5%
± 90%
± 25%
-6
Phase lag [degrees]
-9
± 10%
-12
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000
Frequency [Hz]
Fig. 28: Frequency response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 80 l/min with p=5 bar
Phase lag [degrees]

Frequency [Hz]
Fig. 29: Frequency response of the spool stroke for valves with QN = 100 l/min (26 gpm)
5 Transportation and Storage

Safety instructions:
WARNING
Transportation and
Danger of property damage! Storage
In order to ensure perfect, reliable, and safe operation of the
valves, heed the following:
 The valves must be protected in particular to prevent entry
of dust and moisture.
 The permissible ambient conditions for the valves must be
maintained at all times also in the case of transportation and
storage.
WARNING
Danger of explosion
During transport and storage, cables on the valve, cable glands,
screw plugs, and plug connectors must not be damaged.
 The valve must not be started up with damaged cables, plug
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
To provide protection against injuries or other damaging influ-
ences on health, suitable protective measures must be taken if
necessary prior to and when carrying out any work on the
valves or the machine, such as mounting or removing, electrical
or hydraulic connection, trouble shooting or servicing, and when
handling the valves, accessories, tools or hydraulic fluids.
CAUTION
Risk of damage due to dirt and moisture!
This is the only way of adequately protecting the valves against
the penetration of dirt and moisture and protecting the gaskets/
seals against the effects of ozone and UV.
 The valves must not be transported or stored without their
shipping plate fitted.
 The valve shipping plate may only be removed from the
valve hydraulic ports directly prior to mounting and must
be reinstalled directly after the valve has been removed.
 The shipping plate and the associated fastening elements
(screws and nuts) must be kept for later use, e.g. during
transportation.
CAUTION
Risk of damage due to condensation!
Due to temperature fluctuations during transport and storage of
the valves, humidity may condense.
 Wait with the start-up of the valves until the valves have
reached the ambient temperature
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
The plugs, connectors, and connection cables of the valves
may not be used for other purposes, such as for stepping on or
as transport holders.
CAUTION
Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage to
property are excluded if they are caused by valves, spare parts
or accessories having been stored or transported outside their
original packaging.
 Store and transport valves, spare parts, and accessories
only in properly-sealed original packaging.
  Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Improper handling during transport or storage of the valves,
spare parts, and accessories can cause damage to the original
packaging and to the contents.
 After transporting or storing valves, spare parts and
accessories, check the original packaging and contents for
possible damage.
 Do not start up the system if the packaging or contents
show signs of damage. In this case, notify us or the supplier
responsible immediately.
 In the event of transportation damage, store the damaged
packaging so that if necessary damages can be claimed
from the transport contractor.
5 Transportation and Storage Checking/unpacking a delivery
5.1 Checking/unpacking a delivery

Procedure: Procedure for checking/
unpacking a delivery
1. Check whether the packaging is damaged.
2. Remove packaging.
3. Keep damaged packaging so that damage claims can be lodged against
the transport company.
We recommend that you keep the original packaging for later transporta-
tion or storage operations.
4. Dispose of packaging material that is no longer needed according to the
local specific disposal regulations and environmental protection provi-
sions.
5. Check whether the contents of the packaging are damaged.
6. In case of damaged packaging or damaged content, inform us and the
responsible supplier immediately.
7. Check whether the delivery matches the order and the delivery note.
8. In case of incorrect or incomplete delivery, inform us or the responsible
supplier immediately.
5.2 Scope of delivery of the valve

The scope of delivery of the valve consists of: Scope of delivery
• Valve with mounted oilproof shipping plate at the hydraulic port of the valve
• 5 O-rings ID 12.4 x Ø 1.8 [mm] for ports A, B, P, T and T1
• 2 O-rings ID 15.6 x Ø 1.8 [mm] for port Y and O-ring recess X
• User manual for type series D637K/D639K
5.3 Storage
The following effects may occur in the course of long-term storage: Effects of long-term
• Gasket/seal materials become brittle, possibly resulting in leaks storage
• Hydraulic fluid becomes gummy, possibly resulting in friction
In order to avoid possible resulting impairments or damage, we recommend
that the valve, after a period of storage or operation of more than 5 years, be
inspected by us or one of our authorized service centers.
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System

Safety notes: Mounting
DANGER
and Connection to
Danger of injury due to electric voltage and unexpected the Hydraulic System
movements!
Work on machines that are not shut down presents a danger to
life and limb. Work such as mounting or removal, electrical or
hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or service may only be
performed on machines and valves that are shut down.
 Make sure to shut the machine down and switch it off.
 Make sure that the drive motor cannot be switched on.
 For this purpose, switch off the supply voltage as well as
that of connected peripherals, such as externally powered
transducers or programming units.
 Make sure that all power-transmitting components and
connections (electrical and hydraulic) are switched off
according to the manufacturer's instructions and secured
against switching on again. If possible, remove the main
fuse from the machine.
 Make sure that the machine is completely depressurized.
DANGER
Danger of poisoning and injury due to hydraulic fluid
squirting out under pressure!
 If hydraulic fluid gets into your eyes or on your skin, consult
a doctor immediately.
WARNING
Danger of explosion
For mounting and connection to the hydraulic system, cables
on the valve, cable glands, screw plugs, and plug connectors
must not be damaged.
WARNING
Risk of injury!
ences on health, suitable protective measures must be taken
if necessary prior to and when carrying out any work on
the valves or the machine, such as mounting or removing, elec-
trical or hydraulic connection, trouble shooting or servicing, and
when handling the valves, accessories, tools or hydraulic fluids.
CAUTION
and on the valves.
page 7
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System Dimensions (installation drawings)
6.1 Dimensions (installation drawings)
175
[6.883]
Ø11
[.433]
Ø6.5
[.256]
[9.075]
230.5
[8.65]
220
[6.839]
1
174
[5.346]
[5.228]
136
133
[3.969]
[3.161]
101
[2.591]
80
[1.85]
66
47
36
2x Ø18.7
[1.231]
2 [.736] [1.43]
31
5x Ø15.7
[.618]
74
[2.905]
446
[17.564]
271 175
[10.681] [6.883]
225
[8.87]
192
[7.551]
158
[6.232]
122
[4.803]
77
[3.031]
59.5
[2.343]
26.5
[1.043]
32.5
3 [1.28]
170.5
[6.705]

1 Nameplate  Fig. 11.1, page 165
2 Ex nameplate  Fig. 67, page 166
3 Venting screw The venting screw is only present for valves of the D639K type series.
Fig. 30: Installation drawing for valves with CAN bus interface (dimensions in mm)
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System Mounting surface
Installation space for the connector when mounted:  Fig. 33, page 74
• Hydraulic symbols:  Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic

symbols", page 35
• Procedure for mounting the valve: Chap. "6.3.3 Procedure", page 66
• Position of the ports:  Chap. "6.2.2 Mounting pattern of mounting surface",
page 64
6.2 Mounting surface

If the valve is mounted on the mounting surface, it projects over the
mounting surface.
 Chap. "6.1 Dimensions (installation drawings)", page 63
6.2.1 Surface quality

Evenness as per EN ISO 1302: < 0.01 mm (400 µin) over 100 mm (3.94 in) Evenness and roughness
Average roughness Ra according to of the mounting surface
EN ISO 1302: < 0.8 µm (30 µin)
6.2.2 Mounting pattern of mounting surface

Contrary to ISO 4401-05-05-0-05 the length of the mounting
surface must be at least 100 mm (3.94 in) so that the required
O-ring recesses can be covered on ports X and Y.
0 Mounting pattern
x of mounting surface
23 64.6
10.6
F1 P F2
0
13
9.9
y
X Y
A B
75
T T1
F4 F3 O-ring recesses in the
valve body dia. = 18.7
100 (0.74)
T1
P A T optional B F1 F2 F3 F4 X Y
dia. 11.2 dia. 11.2 dia. 11.2 dia. 11.2 dia. 11.2 M6 M6 M6 M6 - dia. 6.3
(0.44) (0.44) (0.44) (0.44) (0.44) (0.25)
X 27 (1.06) 16.7 3.2 50.8 37.3 0 54 54 0 - 62
(0.66) (0.13) (2.00) (1.47) (2.13) (2.13) (2.44)
Y 6.3 21.4 32.5 32.5 21.4 0 0 46 46 - 11
(0.25) (0.84) (1.28) (1.28) (0.84) (1.81) (1.81) (0.43)
Fig. 31: Hole pattern of the mounting surface according to ISO 4401-05-05-0-05,
dimensions in mm and (in).
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System Mounting the valve
6.3 Mounting the valve

6.3.1 Tools and materials required
The following tools and materials are required for mounting the valves: Required tools and
• For removing the shipping plate materials for mounting
Regular screwdriver 8x1.6 [mm] and if necessary wrench WS 10 the valves
• For mounting the valve
Torque wrench for 5 WAF hexagon socket screws
• Installation screws
 Chap. "6.3.2 Specification for installation screws", page 65
• Replacement for O-rings of ports to be replaced if necessary
 Chap. "12.2 Spare parts", page 175
The installation screws and the O-rings to be replaced if necessary

are not included in the scope of delivery for the valves. They are
available as an accessory.
6.3.2 Specification for installation screws

Hexagon socket head cap screws Quality Number Specification
as per EN ISO 4762 class required Tightening torque for installation
D637K-R/D639K-R M6x60 10.9 4 11 Nm ± 10 % / screws
8 lbf ft +/- 10%
D637K-P/D639K-P M6x40 10.9 4 11 Nm ± 10 % /
8 lbf ft +/- 10%
Tab. 7: Specification for installation screws
6.3.3 Procedure
Safety notes: mounting
CAUTION
the valves
The shipping plate attachment screws must not under any
circumstances be used to mount the valve.
 Use only the installation screws specified here for mounting
the valve.
 The fastening of the valve with non-specified, unsuitable
screws can be destroyed under pressure.
CAUTION
transportation.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion and risk of damage due to overheating!
In order to prevent overheating of the valves.
 Mount the valves so that good ventilation is ensured.
 The maximum permissible temperatures of the respective
temperature classes and the maximum permissible ambient
temperature as well as the maximum permissible
temperature of the hydraulic fluid may not be exceeded.
  Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Vibrations and shocks can damage the valve.
 Do not mount the valve directly on machine parts that are
exposed to strong vibrations or sudden movement.
 On units that are moved in jerks and jolts, the movement
direction of the spool should not be the same as the
movement direction of the unit.
CAUTION
Increased wear and functional faults!
The cleanliness of the connection and mounting surface influ-
ences the cleanliness and the life cycle of the valve. Soiling
causes wear and functional faults.
 Make sure the valve is extremely clean.
 Install the valve dirt-free.
 Make sure that connections and attachments are clean.
 Do not use steel wool or cloths with lint for cleaning.
 Do not use any cleaning agents or methods that could
attack the surfaces or the O-rings mechanically or
chemically.
Mount the valves with venting screw in such a way that it can be
vented.
The venting screw must point upwards.
 Fig. 1, page 18
Procedure: Procedure for mounting

the valves
1. Clean the valve mounting and connecting surfaces.
Check and if necessary correct the evenness and roughness of the
mounting surface.
 Chap. "6.2.1 Surface quality", page 64
2. Remove the shipping plate from the valve's hydraulic port.
The shipping plate and the associated fastening elements (screws and
nuts) must be kept for later use, e.g. during transportation.
3. Check that O-rings in the valve ports (A, B, P, T, etc.) are present and for
elasticity, integrity and correct seating.
If necessary, install O-rings, replace or correct the seating.
4. Paying attention to the mounting pattern, place the valve on the mounting
surface and align with the mounting bores.
5. Secure the valve. To do so, tighten the installation screws (hexagon
socket head cap screws) free from distortion in diagonal sequence.
Tightening torque: 11 Nm ± 10 % / 8 lbf ft +/- 10 %
 Chap. "6.3.2 Specification for installation screws", page 65
7 Electrical connection Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
7 Electrical connection
7.1 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
DANGER
An explosion can be triggered by sparks when switching on
the machine.
 Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be
covered before start-up.
 The eXLink connectors from CEAG must be mounted
according to the instructions in the operating instructions
for the eXLink connector.
 In its standard model with screw plug, the service connector
X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous area.
 The service connector X10 in the standard model M8, 3-pin
must be sealed with the original screw plug belonging to
the valve before start-up.
 For mounting of the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the threads
of the screw plug as well as the threads in the electronic
 In case of damage to the screw plug of the service
connector X10 or the threads in the electronic housing,
the valve must not be operated.
 Tightening torque screw plug:
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion
For the electrical connection of the valve, cables, cable glands,
screw plugs, and connectors must not be damaged.
 The valve must not be started up with damaged cables,
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or
to one of our authorized service centers immediately.
WARNING
Danger of explosion
 The signal interfaces of the valve are implemented with
explosion-proof connectors.
 For mounting and removal of the connectors as well
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property from
interchanged connections!
Interchanging connections causes unforeseeable movements
of the machine and thus corresponding risks to people and
equipment.
 When starting up valves on the field bus for the first time,
we recommend that the component be operated in
a depressurized state.
 Before connecting valves to the field bus, it is essential
to complete the electrical and if necessary hydraulic
connection of the component properly as described in
the user manual.
CAUTION
Danger of personal and property damage due to defective
accessories and defective spare parts!
Unsuitable or defective accessories or unsuitable or defective
spare parts may cause damage, malfunctions or failure of the
valve or the machine.
 Use only original accessories and original spare parts.
CAUTION
Improperly laid connection cables can cause damage, malfunc-
tions or failure of valves or the machine.
 Do not lay valve connection cables in the immediate vicinity
of high-voltage cables or together with cables that switch
inductive or capacitive loads.
CAUTION
For the floating analog inputs of connector X1, the potential
difference (referenced to supply zero) must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
CAUTION
CAUTION
In the signal range 4–20 mA command signals Iin < 3 mA
(e.g. due to a faulty electric cable) indicate a fault.
 The valve response to this fault can be set and activated
via the service or field bus interface in the valve software.
Setting and activation can, for example, take place with
the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
CAUTION
The valves described here must only be operated with external

fuse protection. The information about the external fuse protection
of the valves is included in Chapter 11.  Tab. 28, Seite 171
7.1.1 Protective grounding and electrical shielding

Equipotential bonding/
DANGER
protective conductor
Danger of explosion in case of unsafe operation! system
In order to create as small a potential difference in the machine
and to guarantee safe operation of the machine, the equipoten-
tial bonding and protective conducting system for a machine in
which the valves should be used must be constructed accord-
ing to EN 60204-1.
 Connect all elements of the machine to each other via
equipotential bonding conductors.
 Connect all elements of the machine that have exposed
metal surfaces via protective conductors to the protective
conductor rail.
 Connect all the protective conductors and the equipotential
bonding conductor in the main cabinet via the protective
conductor rail to the protective earth (PE) terminal.
DANGER
Danger to life!
People can be injured and property damaged through the
operation of the valve with an unsafe power supply.
 Only use SELV/PELV power supplies as per EN 60204-1!
DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock!
Very strong current can flow via the shield connection of the
valve.
 Extreme caution is required since for some industrial
applications, no good equipotential bonding can be
implemented.
 An effective equipotential bonding system must be set up in
compliance with EN 60204-1, Section 8.
7.1.2 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
CAUTION
Improper handling of the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software causes malfunctions and thus corresponding risks to
people and equipment.
 For safety reasons, the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software must not be used inside a machine
for visualization purposes or as an operator terminal.
CAUTION
It is not permitted to operate the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software on a field bus while the machine is
running.
It is only permitted to activate valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software if this does not cause any
dangerous states in the machine and in its surroundings.
CAUTION
Activating valves via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software within a network can give rise to unforeseeable
events if field bus communication takes place simultaneously
between the machine control or other bus nodes!
 Deactivate the field bus communication for machine control
and other bus nodes.
CAUTION
Messages from the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software can also be received by other bus nodes. This may
trigger unforeseeable events.
CAUTION
If danger-free operation of the valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software can also not be ensured with
deactivated field bus communication to the machine control
and other bus nodes, the following must be heeded:
 The valves may only communicate depressurized and in
a direct connection (point-to-point) with the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software.
7 Electrical connection Block diagram
CAUTION
Data loss!
Data communication between the valve electronics and the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software may be dis-
rupted if other field bus nodes (e.g. a controller) are accessing
the valve electronics at the same time.
 Deactivate the field bus communication for machine control.
7.2 Block diagram

Block diagram
Field bus interface Galvanic of the valve electronics
isolation
Service interface
Digital signal interface
Analog inputs/outputs
Microprocessor system
Position
transducer
Pressure
sensor
Power supply
Analog input 0
Analog input 1*
Analog output 0
Analog output 1*
Enable input*
Digital output
to the
linear motor
Fig. 32: Block diagram of the valve electronics
* Depending on the model, the valves can have different electrical connections.
7 Electrical connection Arrangement of connectors
7.3 Arrangement of connectors

The depiction of the electronics housing is exemplary for all sizes.
Arrangement of
connectors on the valve
X5 X2 X10 X1
electronics housing
(maximum equipment
specification)
160
120
X6
X7
X3
X4
120
Fig. 33: Arrangement of connectors on the valve electronics housing (maximum equipment
specification)
X1 Connectors, analog signals and supply voltage
 Chap. "7.4 Connector X1", page 76

X2 Connectors, digital signal interfaces are optionally available, must be specified
on order.
 Chap. "7.7 Digital signal interface", page 82

X3 The field bus connectors X3 and X4 are only provided on valves with field bus
X4 interfaces and are optionally available, this must be specified on order.
 Chap. "7.8 Field bus connectors X3 and X4", page 84

X5 Connectors, analog signals
X6
X7  Chap. "7.9 Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7", page 90
X10 The X10 service connector is only present for valves without CAN bus inter-
face. By default, the X10 service connector is not approved for use in hazard-
ous area, however on request it is available for use in hazardous area.
 Chap. "7.10 Service connector X10", page 93
7 Electrical connection Arrangement of connectors
Allocation of interfaces to connectors Allocation of interfaces

to connectors
The valve electronics are equipped with connectors that are designated X1
through X10.
The table below shows which interfaces are accommodated in the different
connectors.
Interface type Interface Connector

Analog input Analog input 0 X1
Analog input 2 X5
Analog input 3 X6
Analog input 4 X7
Analog output Analog output 0 X1
Digital input Digital input 0 X1
Digital output Digital output 0 X1
Digital signal interface SSI transducer X2
Field bus interface CANopen, Profibus-DP, EtherCAT X3, X4
Service interface X10
Tab. 8: Allocation of interfaces to connectors
The availability of the interface depends on the model.
7 Electrical connection Connector X1
7.4 Connector X1
Connector X1 is designed in accordance with EN 175201-804 and is available
in the following versions:
• 7-pin connector with protective conductor contact
7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1

3 Pin assignment of
2
connector X1 (7-pin)
4 1 p/Q valves and Q valves
5
7
6
View of male receptacle X1 on the valve (internal thread, pin contacts)
Contact Assignment Description

1 Analog input 0 Current or voltage input referenced to pin 2,
setpoint Q
2 Reference point for analog Reference point for pins 1 and 3
input 0 and 1
3 Analog input 1 Current or voltage input referenced to pin 2, setpoint p
4 Analog output 0 4–20 mA or 2–10 V referenced to GND, actual
value Q
5 Analog output 1 4–20 mA or 2–10 V referenced to GND, actual value p
6 supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18–23 V) DC based on GND
7 GND, supply zero or GND
signal zero  Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding and electrical
shielding", page 97
Fig. 34: Pin assignment connector X1 (7-pin) p/Q valves

1 Analog input 0 Current or voltage input referenced to pin 2, setpoint Q
2 Reference point for analog Reference point for pin 1
input 0
3 Digital enable input Enable referenced to GND
4 Analog output 0 4–20 mA or 2–10 V referenced to GND, actual
value Q
5 Digital output 0 (standby), Standby monitoring referenced to GND
optional digital output 1
(monitoring)
6 supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18–23 V) DC based on GND
7 GND, supply zero or GND
signal zero  Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding and electrical
shielding", page 97
Fig. 35: Pin assignment connector X1 (7-pin) Q valves
 Chap. "7.14 Wiring connector X1", page 110
7.4.2 Mating connector for connector X1

The mating connector for the 7-pin connector X1 is available as an accessory. Mating connector
 Chap. "12.1 Accessories", page 173 for connector X1
 Chap. "7.13 Permissible lengths for connection cables", page 105
7 Electrical connection Analog inputs/outputs
7.4.3 Power supply
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury due to insufficient electrical safety
The insulating elements used are designed for the safety extra
low voltage range. The circuits of the field bus connections, if
provided, are only functionally isolated from other connected
circuits.
Compliance with the safety regulations requires that the equip-
ment be isolated from the mains system in accordance with
EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-6 and that all voltages be limited
in accordance with EN 60204-1.
 Nominal signal: see nameplate.
 Only use SELV/PELV power supplies!
CAUTION
Risk of EMC damage!
Improper electrical connections can damage the valve electron-
ics and destroy the field bus communication.
 Make the electrical connection so that it is EMC-appropriate.
The supply voltage must be nominally 24 V (18–32 V) DC referenced to supply Requirement of supply
zero. Supply voltages of less than 18 V are detected by the valve electronics voltage
as undervoltage.
The valve electronics are protected against polarity reversal of the connec-
tions.
The power consumption of the valves varies from model to model.
Detailed information can be found in the product-specific valve user
manual.
7.5 Analog inputs/outputs

The analog inputs/outputs are available on connector X1 and the analog inputs Analog inputs/outputs
optionally on connectors X5, X6 and X7. The analog inputs can measure both
current and voltage.
7.5.1 Analog inputs

All current and voltage inputs are differential, but can be connected to ground
(single-ended) by means of external wiring. The analog inputs of connector X1
have a resolution of 12 bits.
7.5.1.1 Signal types

The analog inputs are available in the following versions: Signal types of the analog
• ±10 V inputs on connector X1
• 0–10 V
• ±10 mA
• 0–10 mA
• 4–20 mA
Which signal type is set for the analog inputs on delivery depends on the valve
model. The signal types can be configured via the firmware.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
Signal type for the analog input: ±10 V

In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as a differential voltage Analog input: ±10
input with a ±10 V input range.
The differential input resistance is 20 k.
The input resistance referenced to supply zero is approx. 150 k
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no differential analog source available, the reference point of the

analog input (pin 5) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Signal type for the analog input: 0–10 V

In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as a differential voltage Analog input: 0–10 V
and 32 V.
Signal type for the analog input: ±10 mA

With this signal type, the input current to be measured is directed via the two Analog input: ±10 mA
input pins to an internal shunt.
CAUTION
and 32 V.
If there is no floating analog source available, the reference point of the analog
input (pin 5) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Signal type for the analog input: 0–10 mA

With this signal type, the input current to be measured is directed via the two Analog input: 0–10 mA
CAUTION
and 32 V.

With this signal type, the input current to be measured is directed via the two Analog input: 4–20 mA
CAUTION
and 32 V.
In the 4–20 mA signal range signals of IIn < 3 mA (e.g. due to a defective
electric cable) signify a fault, which can be evaluated by the valve software.
The monitoring must be activated in the valve software.
7.5.2 Analog outputs

Analog outputs 4–20 mA
The reference point for the 4–20 mA analog outputs is supply zero. Analog output: 4–20 mA
The load impedance must be in the range of 0–500 .
Cable break detection of the connected cable can be effected with the
4–20 mA analog outputs.
The 4–20 mA analog outputs are short-circuit protected.
Analog outputs 2–10 V

The reference point for the 2–10 V analog outputs is supply zero. Analog output: 2–10 V
The internal resistance is 500 .
Cable break detection of the connected cable can be effected with the 2–10 V
analog outputs.
Voltage drops in the supply cable to the valve electronics can result in
deviations from the actual value.
Recommendation: Use a 4–20 mA analog output and terminate directly at
the measurement input with 500 .
 Chap. "7.14.2 Conversion of actual value output signals Iout", page 111
7 Electrical connection Digital inputs/outputs
7.6 Digital inputs/outputs

The digital inputs/outputs are available on connector X1 depending on the Digital inputs/outputs
model. The digital input serves as the enable input. The digital outputs indicate
specific events, such as for example the occurrence of a fault.
7.6.1 Digital inputs

Digital enable input
Signals between 8.5 V and 32 V supply voltage referenced to supply zero at Enable input
the enable input are identified as an enable signal.
Signals of less than 6.5 V at the enable input are identified as enable not
issued. The electrical output stage is deactivated if no enable is issued.
This input is also used to acknowledge a valve fault state via an analog signal.
The input current of the digital enable input is 2.3 mA when connected to 24 V.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware pQ" user man-
ual.
7.6.2 Digital outputs

The digital outputs are short-circuit protected and switch off in the event of Valve standby
overload. After a period of cooling down, the digital output switches itself back
on. Overload means a current load in excess of 1.5 A. However, the total cur-
rent consumption of the valve must be limited by a fuse.
High Supply voltage connected. Logic level
Low Supply voltage disconnected (10 k to supply zero).
7 Electrical connection Digital signal interface
7.7 Digital signal interface

The digital signal interface is available on connector X2.
A digital transducer can be connected to this signal interface.
Connector X2 is available in the following versions:
• 7-pin SSI transducer connector X2
 Chap. "7.7.1 SSI transducer", page 82
7.7.1 SSI transducer

This digital signal interface is suitable in accordance with EIA 422 for connect-
ing e.g. position transducers or rotary transducers with an SSI interface.
 Chap. "7.15 Wiring SSI transducers (X2)", page 112
The following transducer types are supported: Supported types
• Coded with binary code of SSI transducers
• Coded with Gray Code
The digital signal interface must be configured.
The signal levels conform to the standard EIA 422.
Recommended cable types

Use exclusively shielded cables with copper braiding shielding with min. 80% Recommended cable
overlap. types for SSI transducer
Copper conductors with a cross section of at least 0.25 mm2.
Use cables with twisted-pair conductors in environments with high background
noise levels.
Cable break monitoring

Inputs CLK and DATA of the digital signal interfaces are monitored for cable Cable break monitoring
break – regardless of which transducer type is connected.
The status of cable break monitoring can be read out via field bus. The reaction
to a cable break is configurable.
7 Electrical connection Digital signal interface
7.7.1.1 Pin assignment SSI transducer connector X2
7 SSI transducer
connector X2
1
6
2
5
3
4
View of the SSI encoder female

receptacle X2 on the valve
(external thread, socket contacts)

1 CLK+ Clock pulse output
2 CLK-
3 DATA+ Data input for transducer data
4 DATA-
5 SensorSup Supply voltage to SSI transducer
24 V / 5 V / 0 V (configurable; see "Firmware"
User Manual)
Imax = 300 mA
6 GND Supply zero
7 not used
Fig. 36: SSI transducer connector X2 (6+PE-pin)
Power supply to the transducer

Power is supplied to the transducer via pin 5 on connector X2. Power supply
to the transducer
There is joint fusing of this power supply for X2, X5, X6 and X7.
The total supply current must therefore not exceed the following
value:
Imax (X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA
The 24 V or 5 V supply voltage is configurable (see "Firmware" User Manual).

An external power supply to the transducer is also possible. However, the 0 V
transducer supply must be connected to supply zero.
The supply voltage is cut off in the event of a possible short circuit in the supply
voltage to the transducer. A fault reaction can be configured (see "Firmware"
User Manual). The voltage is available again as soon as the short circuit has
been eliminated.
7 Electrical connection Field bus connectors X3 and X4
7.8 Field bus connectors X3 and X4

Field bus connectors X3 and X4 are available in the following versions: Versions of the field
• 4-pin CAN connector bus connector
 Chap. "7.8.1 CAN connectors", page 84
• 4-pin Profibus-DP connector
 Chap. "7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors", page 85
• 4-pin EtherCAT connector
 Chap. "7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors", page 87
7.8.1 CAN connectors

The CAN bus has the following features:
• Multi-master system: Each node can transmit and receive
• Topology: Line structure with short stub lines
• Network expansion and transmission rates:
25 m at 1 Mbit/s to 5,000 m at 25 kbit/s
• Addressing type: Message-orientated via identifiers
Priority assignment of messages possible via identifiers
• Security: Hamming distance = 6, i.e. up to 5 individual errors per message
are detected
• Physical Bus: ISO 11898
• Max. nodes: 127 (via repeater)
7.8.1.1 Technical data for the CAN bus interface
EMC protection requirements Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2 (evalua-

tion criterion A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4
Connectors X3 and X4 In each case a 4-pin plug connector with socket connec-
tors (eXLink plug connector Fa. CEAG, coding 1h)
 Chap. "7.8.1.2 Pin assignment, CAN connectors",
page 85
Physical ISO 11898 CAN-HIGH SPEED
Maximum voltage capacity ±40 V long-term (between CAN_H and CAN_L)
±500 V long-term referenced to supply zero
(optical isolation)
±2.5 ESD (classification A: Human Body Model,
C = 100 pF, R = 1.5 k)
Maximum permissible number 32 or 110
of CAN bus nodes  Chap. "7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus
nodes", page 117
Tab. 9: Technical data for the CAN bus interface
7.8.1.2 Pin assignment, CAN connectors
CAN connectors X3
and X4
3 4 5
2 1
View of CAN female receptacle X3 and X4 on

the valve (external thread, socket contacts)

1 CAN_V+ Not connected in the valve
2 CAN_GND CAN terminal resistor
3 CAN_H Transceiver H
4 CAN_L Transceiver L
5 CAN_SHLD Screen (applied on the control cabinet side)
Fig. 37: CAN connectors X3 and X4
CAUTION
Danger of property damage due to improper plug
connection!
In order to avoid damage to the explosion proof connector:
 Heed the notes and instructions in the "Ex connector
eXLink" operating instructions.
7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors

The Profibus-DP has the following features:
• Standardized in accordance with EN 61158-2 (type 3)
• Multi-master system:
Masters share access time and initiate communication.
Slaves react only on request.
• Topology: Line structure with short stub lines
100 m at 12 Mbit/s to 1,200 m at 9.6 kbit/s per segment
Use of repeaters possible
• Addressing type: address-oriented
Priority/cycle time assignment of messages via master configuration
• Physical Bus: RS 485 according to TIA/EIA-485-A
Max. nodes: 127
7.8.2.1 Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface
EMC protection requirements Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2 (evalua- Technical data for the
tion criterion A) Profibus-DP interface
 Chap. "7.8.2.2 Pin assignment, Profibus-DP connec-
tors", page 87
Physical Conformity as per test specification "PROFIBUS slaves
Version 2.0 of the PNO, Order-No: 2.032"
Maximum voltage capacity -9 V to 14 V (long-term) from signal cable to Profi GND
±500 V long-term referenced to supply zero
(optical isolation)
±40 V with a pulse of 15 µs via a resistance of 100 
with an edge duration < 100 ns.
Maximum permissible number 32 bus nodes without repeater
of Profibus-DP nodes With repeater up to 126 nodes
Tab. 10: Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface
7.8.2.2 Pin assignment, Profibus-DP connectors
Profibus DP
connectors X3 and X4
2 3
1 4 5
View of the Profibus-DP female receptacle X3 and X4

on the valve (external thread, socket contacts)

1 Profi V+ Terminal resistors for RXD/TXD-P
2 Profi A RXD/TXD-N
3 Profi GND Terminal resistors for RXD/TXD-N
4 Profi B RXD/TXD-P
5 Shield Positioned on control cabinet side
Fig. 38: Profibus DP connectors X3 and X4
CAUTION
connection!
7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors

The EtherCAT bus has the following features:
• Standardized in accordance with IEC 62407
• Single-master system:
The master initiates communication.
Slaves react only on request.
• Topology:
Line, star, tree and ring structure based on the daisy chain principle
100 m between two nodes at 100 Mbit/s
• Addressing type: Address-orientated, one telegram for all nodes
• Physical Bus: Fast Ethernet
Max. nodes: 65,535
7.8.3.1 Technical data for the EtherCAT interface
EMC protection requirements Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2 (evalua- Technical data for the
tion criterion A) EtherCAT interface
 Chap. "7.8.3.2 Pin assignment, EtherCAT connec-
tors", page 89
Physical 4-core, paired cable as per CAT 5 for 100-Base-TX
transmission
Network topology: Tree and line
Termination: device-internal
Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s
As per EN 61158-2 Type 12 EtherCAT, "PHYSICAL
LAYER SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DEFINI-
TION" and ISO/IEC 8802-3 100 Base-TX (IEEE 802.3
Section 24)
Maximum voltage capacity ±500 V long-term referenced to supply zero
(optical isolation)
Maximum permissible number 65.536
of EtherCAT bus nodes The maximum number of nodes in a field bus line
is 216.
Tab. 11: Technical data for the EtherCAT interface
7.8.3.2 Pin assignment, EtherCAT connectors
EtherCAT connectors
X3 and X4
2 3
1 4
View of the EtherCAT female receptacle X3 and X4 on

the valve (external thread, socket contacts)

1 TX+ Transmit
2 RX+ Receive
3 TX- Transmit
4 RX- Receive
Fig. 39: EtherCAT connectors X3 and X4
CAUTION
connection!
To connect the valves to an EtherCAT network, we recommend molded cord

sets with an integral straight mating connector.
 Chap. "7.18 Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)", page 121
7 Electrical connection Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
7.9 Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7

The analog inputs of connectors X5, X6 and X7 have a resolution of 14 bits.
7.9.1 Pin assignment, analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
4 1 Analog input
connectors X5, X6 and X7
3 2
View of the analog input female receptacle X5, X6 and X7 on the valve
(external thread, socket contacts)

1 Transducer supply +24 V, Imax (X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA referenced to
pin 3
2 Reference point of Reference point for pin 4
analog input
3 Transducer supply 0 V Supply zero
4 Analog input Current or voltage input referenced to pin 2
Fig. 40: Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
 Chap. "7.19 Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)", page 124
Power supply to the transducer

The transducer is supplied with power via pin 1 of connectors X5, X6 and X7. Power supply to
 Fig. 40, page 90 the transducer at
connectors X5, X6, X7
value:
Imax (X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA
An external power supply to the transducer is also possible. However, the

0 V transducer supply must be connected to supply zero. An interruption of the
transducer supply current can be identified as a cable break (see "Firmware"
User Manual).
been eliminated.
7.9.2 Signal types

The analog inputs are available in the following versions: Signal types of the analog
• ±10 V inputs at connectors X5,
X6, X7
• 0–10 V
• 0–10 mA
• 4–20 mA
The inputs can be operated in each case differentially or single-ended
(one input cable referenced to supply zero).
Which signal type is set for the analog inputs on delivery depends on the valve
model. The signal types can be configured via the firmware.
Signal type for the analog input: ±10 V

In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as either a differential or Analog input: ±10
a single-ended voltage input with a ±10 V input range.
 Chap. "7.9.3 Input resistances", page 92
and 32 V.
Signal type for the analog input: 0–10 V

For this signal type, the input is either configured as a differential or as a single- Analog input: 0–10 V
ended voltage input with 0–10 V input range.
and 32 V.

In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as either a differential or Analog input: 0–10 mA
a single-ended current input with a 0–10 mA input range.
The analog input is deactivated in the event of an excessively high input
current.
and 32 V.

In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as either a differential or Analog input: 4–20 mA
a single-ended current input with a 4–20 mA input range.
The analog input is deactivated in the event of an excessively high input
current.
and 32 V.
In the 4–20 mA signal range signals of IIn < 3 mA (e.g. due to a defective
electric cable) signify a fault, which can be evaluated by the valve software.
The monitoring must be activated in the valve software.
7.9.3 Input resistances

The input resistances of the analog inputs are dependent on the set signal type Input resistances
and the version.
Signal type Version RD R1 R2

Voltage Differential 200 k 250 k 10 k
±10 V; 0–10 V
Single-ended 200 k 250 k <5
Current Differential 210  100 k 10 k
0–10 mA; 4–20 mA
Single-ended 210  100 k <5
Tab. 12: Input resistances X5, X6, X7
Analog input
Reference point
of analog input
Sensor supply zero
Fig. 41: Equivalent circuit diagram of analog input
7 Electrical connection Service connector X10
7.10 Service connector X10

This interface serves to connect diagnostic and start-up tools and is available Service connector X10
on connector X10.
Service connector X10

(M8, 3-pin)
View of service connector X10

(external thread, pin contacts)

1 CAN_H Transceiver H
3 Not assigned
4 CAN_L Transceiver L
Fig. 42: Service connector X10 (M8, 3-pin)
Valves without CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via
the service interface (service connector X10) with the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software.
WARNING
 In the standard model with a screw plug, the service
connector X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous area.
 When mounting the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the thread
of the screw plug as well as the thread in the electronic
 In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
 Tightening torque for screw plug:
page 18
7 Electrical connection Service connector X10
DANGER
the machine.
page 18
7 Electrical connection General notes on wiring
7.11 General notes on wiring

DANGER
the machine.
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion
CAUTION
connection!
7 Electrical connection General notes on wiring
The following are required for electrically connecting the valves: Tool required
• Mating connector for connector X1 (7-pin)
• Connection cables for mating connector
• Crimping tool for mating connector with corresponding crimping insert
• Installation tool
The above-mentioned connectors, cables and tools are not included in the
valve scope of delivery. They are supplied separately.
7.11.2 Procedure
Procedure for electrically connecting the valve: Procedure for electrical
connection
1. Conduct electrical connection in accordance with the pin assignment.
 Chap. "7.4 Connector X1", page 76
2. Establish equipotential bonding, protective grounding and electrical
shielding.
 Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding and electrical shielding", page 97
3. Valves with field bus interface: wire field bus.
 Chap. "7.16 Wiring CAN networks", page 113
 Chap. "7.17 Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)", page 118
4. Check whether all the connectors and if necessary the service connector
to which no mating connector is attached are covered with a suitable dust
protection cap.
5. If necessary, put a dust protection cap on.
Make sure to heed the instructions and notes in the eXLink plug
connector operating instructions from CEAG.
7.11.3 Wiring supply cables and digital and analog

signals
Activation of the analog inputs with differential signals is to be preferred. If the Evaluating the different
signal cannot be transmitted differentially, the reference point of the input at the signal types
valve must be connected to ground (supply zero).
Because current inputs have a lower input resistance than voltage inputs and
are thus immune to interference, activation with a current signal is to be
preferred to activation with a voltage signal.
Signal type Benefits Benefits of the different

signal types for analog
±10 V or 0–10 V Simple measurement of the signal, e.g. with an oscilloscope.
inputs
±10 mA or 0–10 mA Large transmission lengths are possible.
4–20 mA Detection of faults in the electrical line and large transmission lengths
are possible.
Tab. 13: Benefits of the different signal types for analog inputs
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding and electrical shielding
7.12 Protective grounding and electrical

shielding
7.12.1 Overview
The valves with integrated electronics are equipped with a protective conductor Guidelines for protective
connection ( ) in the connector or on the valve body in accordance with the grounding
requirements of the standard EN 60204.
This chapter contains guidelines on protective grounding and electrical shielding
of cables in applications in which the valves with integrated electronics are used.
CAUTION
Improper grounding and shielding can cause damage,
malfunctions or failures of valves or the machine.
 The valves should only be used in such machines and
plants that comply with the requirements of the standard
EN 60204-1 and this chapter.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury due to insufficient electrical safety!
Compliance with the safety regulations requires that the equip-
ment be isolated from the mains system in accordance with
EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-6 and that all voltages be limited
in accordance with EN 60204-1.
 Only use SELV/PELV power supplies!
7.12.2 Equipotential bonding and protective

grounding
• The purpose of equipotential bonding is to establish as small a potential Equipotential bonding
difference as possible within the machine. and protective grounding
• Protective grounding serves to maintain safety while the machine is in of machines
operation.
• The term protective earth or PE designates only a single point within the
machine: the connection point of the external protective conductor. All
additional connections to ground ( ) are established via protective and
Control cabinet
Electronic housing
Control electronics
Shield NOT Shield connected

connected to to valve plug
Connection between control electronic housing
cabinet, shield, and PE
Shield, coverage > 80%
Valve
Protective Shield connected to control cabinet with integrated
conductor electronics
rail Equipotential bonding conductor
Machine
Potential difference
Fig. 43: Equipotential bonding and protective grounding of machines (see also EN 60204-1) and
electrical shielding of our valves with integrated electronics
7.12.2.1 General principles
DANGER
Danger of explosion in case of unsafe operation!
In order to create as small a potential difference in the machine
and to guarantee safe operation of the machine, the equipoten-
tial bonding and protective conducting system for a machine in
which the valves should be used must be constructed accord-
ing to EN 60204-1.
 Connect all elements of the machine to each other via
 Connect all elements of the machine that have exposed
metal surfaces via protective conductors to the protective
conductor rail.
 Connect all the protective conductors and the equipotential
bonding conductor in the main cabinet via the protective
conductor rail to the protective earth (PE) terminal.
Observe the following points when performing equipotential bonding and Performing equipotential
protective grounding: bonding
• Connect all elements of the machine to each other via equipotential bond-
ing conductors.
• Connect all elements of the machine that have exposed metal surfaces
via protective conductors to the protective conductor rail.
• Connect all the protective conductors and the equipotential bonding con-
ductor in the main cabinet via the protective conductor rail to the protec-
tive earth (PE) terminal.
The cross section of the protective conductor is specified in Required cross section of
EN 60204-1, Section 8. The following cross section have proven the protective conductor
successful for equipotential bonding conductors:
up to 200 m cable length: 16 mm2
up to 200 m cable length: 25 mm2
The potential difference between any two points within the machine Maximum potential
should not be more than 7 V peak (7 V̂ ). difference
• Connect the electrical shielding and the electrical ground of the electron-
ics chassis point-to-point to the protective conductor rail.
• Before releasing a machine for normal operation, always check that all
equipotential bonding and protective conductors are in proper working
order in accordance with EN 60204-1, Section 18.
7.12.2.2 Protective conductor

The valves must essentially only be operated with safe power supplies Requirements of the
(SELV/PELV). No dangerous voltages are generated in the valve. Therefore, protective conductor
no protective conductor must be connected.
DANGER
Danger to life!
People can be injured and property damaged through the
operation of the valve with an unsafe power supply.
 Only use SELV/PELV power supplies as per EN 60204-1!
7.12.2.3 Ground loops

If a valve is connected to protective earth (PE) both via the equipotential bond- Avoiding ground loops
ing system and via the valve protective conductor, a compensating current can
split in the resulting ground loop. This current can cause serious malfunctions
in the machine.
Observe the following points in order to minimize as much as possible malfunc-
tions caused by a ground loop:
• Route the valve supply and signal cables as closely as possible to the
equipotential bonding conductor.
 Chap. "7.12.3 Machines with deficient equipotential bonding", page 101
• The impedance of the equipotential bonding system should be less than
10 % of the impedance of the systems comprising cable protective con-
ductors and shields.
7.12.3 Machines with deficient equipotential bonding

Deficient equipotential
DANGER
bonding
Danger to life due to electric shock!
Very strong current can flow via the shield connection of the
valve.
 Extreme caution is required since for some industrial
applications, no good equipotential bonding can be
implemented.
 An effective equipotential bonding system must be set up in
compliance with EN 60204-1, Section 8.
7.12.4 Electrical shielding

An effectively shielded machine is to a high degree immune to external interfer- Electrical shielding
ence sources. Furthermore, the interference emitted by the machine is reduced
considerably by effective shielding.
A functioning equipotential bonding system provides the basis for an effectively
shielded machine. To ensure that the cables are effectively shielded, it is es-
sential to satisfy the general requirements with regard to equipotential bonding
and protective grounding.
 Chap. "7.12.2 Equipotential bonding and protective grounding", page 98
7.12.4.1 Cables
Observe the following points when choosing cables for connecting the valves: Requirements of cables
• Only use shielded cables.
• The cable shield should be made of copper braiding with a minimum 80 %
coverage.
• The individual conductors must be made of copper and have a minimum
cross section of 0.2 mm2 in accordance with EN 60204-1.
• Use cables with twisted pair conductors in environments with high back-
ground noise levels.
• The protective conductor should be guided within the cable shield.
 Chap. "7.12.2.2 Protective conductor", page 100
7.12.4.2 Connecting the shield

When connecting the shield, use metal shell connectors with
a leading protective earth contact ( ) in accordance with
EN 60204-1.
Connection on the valve side

Connect the cable shield conductively to the metal shell of the connector. Connecting the shield
on the valve side
Connection on control cabinet side
Connection on the control cabinet side can be completed with either lead- Connecting the shield on
through cables or connectors. the control cabinet side
Cable leadthrough
Observe the following points when connecting the shield on the control cabinet Connecting the shield
side: with cable leadthrough
• Connect the control cabinet's wall conductively to the protective conductor
rail ( ).
 Fig. 43, page 98
• Connect the cable shield correctly (flat, conductively) to the control
cabinet's wall.
Cable to Sheath of the cable

the chassis removed, shield laid bare
Cable to
the valve
Shield
connected
Control cabinet housing
conductively
to housing
Fig. 44: Connecting the shield to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from fig. 43)
WARNING
Danger due to electric shock!
The shield of the cable must be laid correctly in order to prevent
faults in the machine and injuries to people.
 Do NOT connect the shield of the cable with the electronics
chassis.
• Lead the cable shield without interruption through the wall of the EMC-
compliant control cabinet as closely as possible to the electronics chassis,
e.g. by means of a cable gland.
Plug connection
Observe the following points when connecting the shield on the control cabinet Connecting the shield
side: with plug connection
rail ( ).
 Fig. 43, page 98
• Connect the shield of the cable coming from the valve to the housing of
the removable connector.
The housing of the connector permanently mounted in the control
cabinet must demonstrate a good-conducting connection with the
wall of the control cabinet.
• Connect the connector mounted in the wall of the control cabinet to the
shield inside the cabinet.
Good conducting connection

between plug connector housing, Metal housing plug
control cabinet housing, and shield connector with -contact
Cable to
the valve
Cable to Shield is connected to

the chassis plug connector housing
Fig. 45: Connecting the cable shield via connector to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from
fig. 43)
• Lead the shield inside the control cabinet as closely as possible to the
electronics chassis.
WARNING
chassis.
7.12.4.3 Insulated shielding

If connecting the shield to both ends of the cable is not desirable, such as in Insulated shielding in
a machine with deficient equipotential bonding, insulated shielding may be re- the event of deficient
quired. However, this is normally only necessary if it is not possible to establish equipotential bonding
a good equipotential bonding system.
Observe the following points when connecting insulated shielding:
• Use metal shell connectors with a leading protective earth contact ( ) in
accordance with EN 60204-1.
• Connect the cable shield conductively to the metal shell of the connector.
rail ( ).
 Fig. 43, page 98
• Connect the cable shield via a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF / 100 VDC ceramic
capacitor) to the control cabinet's wall.
Sheath of the cable removed,

shield interrupted
Control cabinet
Cable to housing
the chassis
Cable to
the valve
Shield connected
conductively Screw terminal
to housing insulated against
control cabinet
Condenser housing
Fig. 46: Connecting the insulated shielding to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from fig. 43)
• Install a separate shield connected to the control cabinet's wall inside the
control cabinet. Route this shield as closely as possible to the electronics
chassis.
WARNING
chassis.
7 Electrical connection Permissible lengths for connection cables
7.12.4.4 Cable routing

The routing of the cable inside a machine must comply with the following gen- Cable routing inside
eral guidelines: the machine
• Route supply and signal cables in separate cable conduits.
• In order to minimize malfunctions caused by a ground loop, route the
valve connection cables as closely as possible to the equipotential bond-
ing conductor.
 Chap. "7.12.2.3 Ground loops", page 100
• Do not route cable conduits near strong electromagnetic interference
sources, such as electric motors or transformers.
• If the cable routing cannot eliminate the risk of lightning strokes
completely, suitable protective measures must be taken, as described in
EN 60204-1.
7.13 Permissible lengths for connection

cables
7.13.1 Introduction
The valves with integrated electronics are supplied via 24 V supply cables and Dimensioning of supply
controlled via analog or field bus cables. and signal cables
This section of the chapter is intended to serve as a guide to dimensioning and
configuring supply and signal cables in order to guarantee adequate supply
voltage and signal quality for all the permissible valve operating states.
The maximum permissible length of supply and signal cables is limited by the
resistance and the capacitance per unit length of the cables.
7.13.2 Typical values for copper cables

The typical values specified here are used in the example calculations in the
following sections.
7.13.2.1 Resistance of cable

The typical resistance Rtyp of a copper cable of length  is calculated as fol- Calculating the resistance
lows:
 Cu m
-  l  = 23.73
R typ = ------------ -------------- l
q typ m
2
q typ = 0.25 mm Typical cross section used for connection ca-
bles
2
mm
 Cu = 0.0178 -----------------------
m
Resistivity of copper at 20 °C
7.13.2.2 Capacitance of cable

The typical capacitance per unit length of copper cables is 50 pF/m. Calculating
The typical capacitance Ctyp of a copper cable of length  is calculated as fol- the capacitance
lows:
pF
-l
C typ = 50 -----------
m
7.13.3 24V supply cables

The maximum permissible length max of the supply cable is calculated as Calculating the maximum
follows: length of supply cables
U dr_max
l max = ---------------------------
-
U
 ------------
ab
 l  typ
U ab 
U dr_max = l max   ------------
 l  typ
Umin = 18 V Lowest permissible supply voltage for valve
Udr_max = 6 V Maximum permissible voltage drop over the supply

cable
Udr_max = 24 V - Umin
U ab  voltage drop per unit length

 ------------
 l  typ  Chap. "7.13.3.1 Voltage drop per unit length",
page 107
This calculation does not take into account a possible reduction of

the power supply output voltage on account of the connected load.
Nor does it take into account any voltage dips that can occur at the
moment when additional loads are connected.
7.13.3.1 Voltage drop per unit length
Valve
Cable length
Fig. 47: Voltage drop on the supply cable
The voltage drop per unit length over the forward and return lines of the supply
cable is calculated as follows:
U ab 
 ------------ R typ 
= 2  I max   -------------
- = 2  I max  23.73 m
--------------
 l  typ  l  m
Imax Maximum current consumption of valve

(see product-specific valve user manual)
Rtyp Typical resistance of the cable

 Chap. "7.13.2.1 Resistance of cable", page 105
 Length of the supply cable
7.13.3.2 Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables
Voltage drop Examples of the voltage

Max. current con- U ab  drop of supply cables
sumption  ------------ Max. permissible
Valve series Imax
 l  typ cable lengthmax
D637K/D639K 2,200 mA 104 mV/m 58 m
Tab. 14: Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables as a function of the cable length for a cable
cross section of 0.75 m2
7.13.4 Analog signal cables

Influence of resistance R
The influence of the resistance R of the cable used on the maximum cable Influence of resistance R
length max for signal cables is very low, as the currents flowing through signal
cables are very small.
Example:
For a cable length  of 428 m the resistance R according to the formula below
is only 10 
 Cu m
-  l = 23.73
R = ------------ --------------  428 m  10 
q typ m
Influence of capacitance per unit length

The influence of the capacitance per unit length of the cable used on the maxi- Influence of capacitance
mum cable length max for signal cables is considerably greater. per unit length
The capacitance C that increases with the cable length forms with the input Calculating the limit
resistance R of an analog input a high pass of the first order, which can couple frequency
high-frequency interference for example at signal inputs. The limit frequency fl
of the high pass is calculated as follows:
1
f g = -------------------------------
-
2RC
The longer the cable, the lower the limit frequency fl of the high pass.
Example:
A cable length  of 10 m and a typical analog input resistance R of 10 k
produce according to the formula below a limit frequency fl of 32 kHz.
1 1
f g = -------------------------------- = -------------------------------------------------
-
2RC 2    R  50 ----------- pF
-l
m
1
f g = ------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
pF
2    10 k  50 ----------- m
-  10 m
f g = 32 kHz
Recommendations
With a differential voltage command signal and a cable length  of 10 m the
EMC test was conducted in accordance with EN 61000-6-2. The interference
on the spool position during the interference (electromagnetic coupling, tran-
sient) was below 1 %. This can worsen as the cable is lengthened.
Experience shows that with cable lengths over 15 m a current input should be Current input with
used, as here the input resistance is smaller by a factor of 50. cable length > 15 m
The limit frequency fl of the high pass also increases by the same factor, and
with it the input becomes more immune to interference.
Furthermore, the voltage drop on the cable does not have an effect in the event
of a current command signal.
A differential input is always to be recommended, regardless of whether a volt- Recommendation:
age or current signal is used as the command signal, since interference differential input
coupled on the two input cables is subtracted to virtually zero.
7.13.5 Digital signal cables

7.13.5.1 Digital signal input cables
Digital signal input cables, such as enable, are more non-critical with regard to Length of digital
their cable lengths, because the currents are low (< 20 mA) and a greater signal cables
noise level distance is easier to maintain, since only two states/levels must be
differentiated.
7.13.5.2 Digital signal output cables

With digital signal output cables, such as monitoring and standby, currents up
to 1.5 A are encountered. In these cases, the voltage drop over longer cables
can no longer be neglected. Thus, these cables are subject to the same re-
quirements as supply cables.
7.13.5.3 Field bus cables

In the case of digital field bus cables, the maximum possible cable lengths are Length of field bus cables
very different. For the most part the cable ends are terminated with low resis-
tance (power adaptation) in order to avoid signal reflections, which permits
longer cable lengths. The maximum possible cable lengths are laid down in
the standards of the relevant field buses and depend among other things on
the transmission rate used.
7 Electrical connection Wiring connector X1
7.14 Wiring connector X1

Wiring of the 7-pin
Q-valve
connector X1
6 Supply voltage 24 V
7 Supply zero (GND)
3 Digital input (enable)
1 Analog input 0
Signal source
2 Reference point for analog input 0
4 Analog output 0
5 Digital output 0 (standby)

(optional digital output 1 (monitoring))
Fig. 48: Wiring of the 7-pin connector X1 Q valve
p/Q-valve
6 Supply voltage 24 V
7 Supply zero (GND)
3 Analog input 1
1 Analog input 0
Signal source
2 Reference point for analog input 0 and 1
Signal source
4 Analog output 0
5 Analog output 1
Fig. 49: Wiring of the 7-pin connector X1 pQ valve
7.14.1 Single-ended command signals

Activation of the command inputs with differential signals is to be preferred.
If the command signal cannot be transmitted differentially, the reference point
of the command input at the valve must be connected to ground (GND).
Isupply Circuit for single-ended

command signals
Icomm
Supply Command Power

24 V signal Ucomm
source element
Valve
Ucable
Connector cable
Fig. 50: Circuit for single-ended command signals
7 Electrical connection Wiring connector X1
If the command inputs are connected to ground (single-ended), the connection Single-ended connection
cable must be as short as possible and have an appropriately large cross sec- of the command inputs
tion in order to keep the voltage drop as low as possible.
The voltage drop on the forward and return lines is generated by the supply
current ISupply of the valve electronics power circuit. It is proportional to the
length of the connection cable and varies according to the valve status.
Maximum permissible cable lengths:
The voltage drop Ucable on the return line and the resulting potential shift of Input voltage Uin = Ucomm -
ground (supply zero) results in not the command signal Ucomm but rather the Ucable
input voltage Uin being applied at the command input in accordance with the
following equation:
Uin = Ucomm - Ucable
In the case of command signal sources with impressed current Icomm, the Command signal sources
potential shift of ground (supply zero) has no effect on the signal. However, with impressed
changes in the voltage drop resulting from the valve's varying current current Icomm
consumption must be corrected by the command signal source. If current
control does not follow the voltage change in terms of time, the command
signal at the valve input may also be affected here.
The function of single-ended command inputs is identical to the
function of differential command inputs.
7.14.2 Conversion of actual value output signals Iout

The actual value output signals Iout 4–20 mA can be converted into Uout 2–10 V Conversion of actual
in accordance with the following circuit. value output signals Iout
4–20 mA into 2–10 V
7.14.2.1 Valves with 7-pin connector X1
Valve RL = 500  (0.25 W)
Actual value pin 4

Uout = 2–10 V
Fig. 51: Circuit for converting the actual value output signals Iout (for valves with 7-pin
connector X1)
7 Electrical connection Wiring SSI transducers (X2)
7.15 Wiring SSI transducers (X2)

An SSI transducer delivers an absolute position or angle signal, which can be Wiring SSI transducers
read in via the digital signal interface. (X2)
7.15.1 SSI master mode

In SSI master mode the integrated electronics generate internally the SSI clock
signal (CLK) with settable frequencies in the range between 78 kHz and
5 MHz.
In the rest state the clock signal is at 1. The first falling edge of the clock signal
signals to the SSI transducer to maintain its current value. The following rising
edge of the clock signal starts the data transmission of the SSI transducer. The
output starts with the highest-value bit (MSB). After a complete data record has
been transmitted, the SSI transducer holds the data signal at 0 until it is ready
for a new transmission. The switching back of the data signal to 1 simulta-
neously satisfies the start condition for the SSI interface for triggering a new
read-in cycle.
Wiring diagram with

Valve
SSI transducer
Data signal
Valve with SSI transducer
SSI transducer
input SSI clock signal (CLK)
Fig. 52: Wiring diagram with SSI transducer
Signals between valve and

CLK
a 16-bit SSI transducer
(example)
Daten MSB D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 LSB
Fig. 53: Signals between valve and a 16-bit SSI transducer (example)
The signal levels conform to the standard EIA 422.

SSI transducers can be used with either Gray codes or binary coded data.
A maximum of 32 bits is possible.
7 Electrical connection Wiring CAN networks
7.16 Wiring CAN networks

The valves are equipped with an electrically isolated CAN interface depending
on the model. The CAN interface is supplied internally.
Procedure for connecting the valve to the CAN bus Procedure
CAUTION
Failure to heed safety instructions causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding risks to people and equipment.
 Please heed all the safety instructions prior to and during
start-up.
1. Establish the electrical connection to the CAN bus.

 Chap. "7.8.1 CAN connectors", page 84
2. Set the module address.
 Chap. "7.16.3 CAN module address (node ID)", page 117
3. Set the transmission rate.
 Chap. "7.16.4 CAN transmission rate", page 117
4. Check the configuration of the valve software and the controller settings.
Observe the following points when wiring CAN networks:

• All cables, connectors and terminal resistors used in CAN networks
should comply with ISO 11898.
• Correct version of protective grounding and electrical shielding.
• Use shielded cables with four cores (twisted pair) and surge impedance of
120  (CAN_H, CAN_L, CAN_GND and CAN_SHLD grounded).
• A CAN bus cable must not branch but short stub cables with T-connectors
are permitted.
• Stub cables must be as short as possible.
• Maximum stub cable length:
 Chap. "7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections", page 116
• The cable between CAN_L and CAN_H at both CAN bus cable ends must
be ended by a terminal resistor of 120  ± 10 %.
• A terminal resistor can be omitted if the valve-internal terminal resistor
(deactivated as standard) is activated (for configuration, see "Firmware"
User Manual).
• Reference potential CAN_GND and CAN_SHLD may be connected to
protective earth (PE) at one point only (e.g. on a connector with terminal
resistor).
• The transmission rate must be adapted to the CAN bus cable length.
 Chap. "7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections", page 116
• The maximum permissible number of CAN bus nodes in the CAN network
must not be exceeded.
 Chap. "7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus nodes", page 117

• Do not lay CAN Bus cables in the immediate vicinity of disturbance
sources. If interference sources cannot be avoided, use double-shielded
cables.
Wiring diagram of
Terminal resistor with the CAN network
ground connection
Control
Branch line
Branch line
No terminal
resistor
Valve Valve Valve
Fig. 54: CAN wiring diagram
Customer-side connection
In the customer-side eXLink connector, a bridge must of CAN bus to the valve
be set internally between pin 3 and pin 2 if the terminal if terminal resistor is
resistor should be switched.
4 3 required
The looping through of a supply voltage is
not possible with this type of terminal resistor.
5
1 2
Fig. 55: Connection of the CAN bus valve with terminal resistor
For CAN bus nodes without a galvanically isolated CAN bus inter- Interference immunity
face, CAN_GND is generally connected to supply voltage GND in CAN networks
inside the device.
In these cases, the supply voltage connection cable must be
grounded at the same point inside the machine as the CAN_GND
connection cable.
Maximum interference immunity is achieved in extensive CAN
networks by using solely CAN bus nodes with galvanically isolated
CAN bus interface.
If it is not possible to dispense with CAN bus nodes without galvan-
ically isolated CAN bus interface, arrange these nodes in the
immediate vicinity of the central ground point. The cable length to
this central ground point is to be kept as short as possible. It is
particularly important in this respect to ensure that the equipotential
bonding line is properly dimensioned!
Field bus connector X3 USB port Connection of the valve

to a PC via the CAN bus
USB start-up
interface (X3)
Valve Configuration/ module PC
start-up cable
Hazardous area Safe area
Fig. 56: Connection of the valve to a PC via the CAN bus interface (field bus connector X3)
DANGER
page 18
The use of the service interface is only permitted outside the haz-
ardous area.
7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections

Transmission rate Maximum cable length Cable lengths and
cable cross sections
1000 kbit/s 25 m
800 kbit/s 50 m
500 kbit/s 100 m
250 kbit/s 250 m
125 kbit/s 500 m
100 kbit/s 650 m
50 kbit/s 1000 m
20 kbit/s 2500 m
Tab. 15: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in CAN networks, depending on the trans-
mission rate
Maximum cable length for n CAN bus nodes Maximum cable length
Cable cross section n = 32 n = 64 n = 100
0.25 mm2 200 m 170 m 150 m
0.50 mm2 360 m 310 m 270 m
0.75 mm2 550 m 470 m 410 m
Tab. 16: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in CAN networks, depending on the cable
cross section and the number n of CAN bus nodes
Maximum stub cable length Maximum length

of stub cables
Transmission rate Maximum Cumulative
1000 kbit/s 2m 20 m
500 kbit/s 6m 39 m
250 kbit/s 6m 78 m
125 kbit/s 6m 156 m
Tab. 17: Maximum permissible stub cable lengths in CAN networks
7.16.1.1 Suitable cable types for CAN networks
Parameter Value Suitable cable types

for CAN networks
Surge impedance 120 
Tab. 18: Specification of electrical data for CAN bus cables
Manufacturer Cable type

Web: http://www.draka- Draka ToughCAT7 Mud Protected
mog.com
Tab. 19: Suitable cable types for CAN networks
7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus nodes

The CAN bus interface for the valve electronics supports integration in CAN Maximum number
networks with up to 110 CAN bus nodes. of CAN bus nodes
However, the maximum permissible number of CAN bus nodes can be
restricted by other nodes with an older CAN bus driver to 32.
A maximum of 127 nodes can be operated in a CAN network thanks to the use
of repeaters. However, it is necessary to bear in mind here the additionally
inserted signal propagation time, which limits the maximum expansion of the
CAN network.
7.16.3 CAN module address (node ID)

CAN module address
CAUTION
(node ID)
Danger due to malfunctions!
A multiple use of module addresses causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding dangers to people and equipment.
 Each module address may only be used once within a CAN
bus network.
The factory setting for the module address of the valve electronics is 127.
The module address can be changed with the LSS services (Layer Setting
Services) via the CAN bus.
If there are no additional nodes present on the CAN bus, it is possible to set the
node ID via the LSS Service Switch Mode Global.
To change the module address of the valve electronics with a CAN bus net-
work, it is essential to address the valve electronics unambiguously via the LSS
address. The node ID is then set via the LSS Service Switch Mode Selective.
It is also possible to configure the module address via service interface X10.
The module address of the valve electronics can also be altered
7.16.4 CAN transmission rate

The transmission rate must be set to the same value for all the CAN transmission rate
CAN bus nodes within a CAN bus network.
The factory setting for the transmission rate is 500 kbit/s.

The transmission rate can be changed with the LSS services
(Layer Setting Services) via the CAN bus.
The transmission rate of the valves/pumps can also be altered with

the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
7 Electrical connection Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)
7.17 Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)

The valves are equipped with an electrically isolated Profibus-DP interface Wiring Profibus-DP
depending on the model. The Profibus-DP interface is supplied internally. networks
Procedure for connecting the valves to the Profibus-DP Procedure
CAUTION
start-up.
1. Establish the electrical connection to the Profibus-DP.

 Chap. "7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors", page 85
2. Set the module address.
 Chap. "7.17.3 Profibus-DP module address (node ID)", page 120
3. Check the configuration of the valve software and the controller settings.
Observe the following points when wiring Profibus-DP networks:

• It is recommended to use 2-core Profibus cables so as to prevent the
power supply to the terminal resistors from being connected in parallel.
• The specification EN 61158-2 describes two cable types. Type B can be
used with limitation.
• Stub cables must be as short as possible.
• Avoid stub cables in the case of transmission rates in excess of
1,500 kbit/s.
• If stub cables are used, do not use any terminal resistors in this branch.
• The stub cable length in the case of transmission rates in excess of
1,500 kbit/s should not exceed 6.6 m in total.
Terminal Wiring diagram of the

resistor Profibus-DP networks
Control
Branch line
Branch line
No terminal
resistor
Valve Valve Valve
Fig. 57: Profibus-DP wiring diagram
Customer-side connection
of Profibus to the valve
if terminal resistor is
In the customer-side eXLink connector,
2 a bridge must be set internally between required
3
pin 1 and pin 4 and pin 2 and pin 3
if the terminal resistor should
be switched.
5
4 1
Fig. 58: Connection valve Profibus with terminal resistor
7.17.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections

Transmission rate Maximum cable length without repeaters Cable lengths and
cable cross sections
12,000 kbit/s 100 m
1,500 kbit/s 200 m
500 kbit/s 400 m
187.5 kbit/s 1,000 m
93.75 kbit/s 1,200 m
45.45 kbit/s 1,200 m
19.2 kbit/s 1,200 m
9.6 kbit/s 1,200 m
Tab. 20: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in Profibus-DP networks, depending on
the transmission rate
7.17.1.1 Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks
Parameter Value Suitable cable types for

Profibus-DP networks
Characteristic cable impedance () 135–165
at 3–20 MHz
Effective capacitance (pF/m) < 30
Loop impedance (/km) < 110
Cable diameter (mm) > 0.64
Cable cross section (mm2) > 0.34
Tab. 21: Specification of electrical data for Profibus-DP cables (as per type A)
Manufacturer Cable type

Web: http://www.drakamog.com Draka ToughCAT7 Mud Protected
Tab. 22: Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks
7.17.2 Permissible number of Profibus nodes

The Profibus-DP interface of the valve electronics supports integration into Permissible number
Profibus-DP networks with up to 32 Profibus nodes. of Profibus-DP nodes
A maximum of 126 nodes can be operated in a Profibus-DP network with to the
use of repeaters.
7.17.3 Profibus-DP module address (node ID)

Profibus-DP module
CAUTION
address (node ID)
 Each module address may only be used once within
a Profibus DP network.
The module address can be configured by sending a Set_Slave_Add telegram

from a controller. There is also the option of configuring the module address by
writing to the Profibus module identifier.
7.17.4 Profibus-DP transmission rate

The valve electronics are automatically set to the transmission rate specified Profibus-DP
by the Profibus master. It is not possible, nor is it necessary, to configure the transmission rate
transmission rate on the slave side.
7 Electrical connection Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)
7.18 Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)

The valves are equipped with an electrically isolated EtherCAT interface Wiring EtherCAT networks
depending on the model. The EtherCAT interface is supplied internally.
Procedure for connecting the valves to the EtherCAT bus Procedure
CAUTION
start-up.
1. Establish the electrical connection to the EtherCAT bus.

 Chap. "7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors", page 87
2. Optional: Set the module address.
 Chap. "7.18.3 EtherCAT module address (node ID)", page 123
3. Check the configuration of the valve software and the controller settings,
in particular the command signal source.
Observe the following points when wiring EtherCAT networks:

• All cables must be designed as shielded cables with twisted-pair litz
wires as per ISO/IEC 8802-3 100 Base-TX and CAT 5 as per
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
• The cable length between two nodes must not exceed 100 m as per
ISO/IEC 8802-3 100 Base-TX.
• The maximum permissible number of EtherCAT nodes must not exceed
65,536.
• The cable between the nodes must not branch.
• An external cable termination (terminal resistor) as in CAN or Profibus-DP
networks is not necessary.
Wiring diagram of the

EtherCAT network
Control
No terminal
resistor
Valve Valve Valve
Fig. 59: EtherCAT wiring diagram
Tx+ Rx+ Pin assignment for

1 1 the EtherCAT cable
Tx- Rx-
3 3
Rx+ Tx+
2 2
Rx- Tx-
4 4
Fig. 60: Twisted-pair litz wires in Ethernet/EtherCAT cables with M12 connectors
An RJ45 connector is usually used on the controller side. The colors of the litz
wires are standardized in accordance with IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet.
Litz wire (RJ45,

Signal X3, X4 Litz wire RJ45 4-core cable)
TX+ 1 yellow 1 orange/white
(yellow/white)
RX+ 2 white 3 green/white
TX- 3 orange 2 orange
RX- 4 blue 6 green
Shield Housing
Tab. 23: Assignment of Ethernet/EtherCAT signals with mixed connector types
7.18.1 Suitable cable types for EtherCAT networks

CAT 5 cable according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. e.g. Draka ToghCAT7 Mud Suitable cable types
Protected for EtherCAT networks
7.18.2 Permissible number of EtherCAT nodes

The EtherCAT interface of the valve electronics supports integration into Ether- Permissible number
CAT networks with up to 65,535 EtherCAT nodes. of EtherCAT nodes
The maximum number of nodes in a field bus line is 216.
The number of nodes determines the signal propagation time of the data
packets and the resulting possible cycle times.
7.18.3 EtherCAT module address (node ID)

EtherCAT module address
CAUTION
(node ID)
 Each module address may only be used once within an
EtherCAT network.
EtherCAT nodes can be addressed using the physical position within the
network. This procedure is known as auto-increment addressing.
If position-independent addressing is preferred, a static module address can
also be allocated. This addressing type is known as fixed node addressing.
Auto-increment addressing
Each EtherCAT node is identified using the physical position within the network
segment. For this purpose, each EtherCAT node increments a 16-bit address
field within a telegram, which is sent through the entire network. The advantage
of this mechanism lies in the fact that no module address has to be set manu-
ally for the field bus nodes.
Fixed node addressing

With fixed node addressing a node is addressed via the so-called Configured
Station Alias. This address can be configured by the network master in the
Slave Information Interface (SII).
There is also the option of configuring the module address by writing to the
EtherCAT module identifier.
The advantage of fixed node addressing over auto-increment addressing lies in
the fact that the nodes can still be addressed at the same address even after
the network topology has been changed or after nodes have bee added or
removed.
7.18.4 EtherCAT transmission rate

EtherCAT works with a fixed transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. EtherCAT-DP
transmission rate
7 Electrical connection Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)
7.19 Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)

The supply voltage for powering the transducers is available at pin 1. Maximum current
of transducer supply
value:
Imax (X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA
An external power supply to the transducer is also possible. However, the 0 V

transducer supply must be connected to supply zero. An interruption of the
transducer supply current can be identified as a cable break (see "Firmware"
User Manual).
been eliminated.
The supply current for each transducer is monitored for the purpose of detect-
ing cable breaks. Supply currents under 1 mA can trigger a configurable fault
reaction.
2/3/4-wire transducers with a voltage or current output can be connected to X5,
X6 and X7. Each input can be individually adapted.
7 Electrical connection Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)
2-wire transducers
2-wire transducers can only be operated in the signal type for the 0–10 mA or
4–20 mA analog input in the single-ended version.
Wiring the 2-wire

transducer
1 - Transducer supply
+
2 - Reference point for analog input
2-wire transducer
3 - Transducer supply 0 V
-
4 - Analog input
Fig. 61: Connecting a 2-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7
3-wire transducers
3-wire transducers can only be operated in the single-ended version.
Wiring the 3-wire

transducer
+
OUT
3-wire transducer
-
4 - Analog input
4-wire transducers
4-wire transducers should be operated in the differential version.
Wiring the 4-wire

transducer
+ OUT
4-wire transducer
REF
-
4 - Analog input
7 Electrical connection Electrical start-up
7.20 Electrical start-up

DANGER
the machine.
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion
WARNING
Danger of explosion
For electrical start-up, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
plugs, and connectors must not be damaged.
7 Electrical connection Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
7.21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

The machine manufacturer is responsible for complying with the EMC Direc- EMC requirements
tive.
The valves fulfill the EMC protection requirements for interference immunity as
per EN 61000-6-2 (evaluation criterion A) and for emitted interference as per
EN 61000-6-4 (CAN bus and Profibus-DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3 (Ether-
CAT).
The following technical requirements must be in place so that the EMC protection
requirements can be satisfied:
• Use of the mating connectors recommended for the valves.
• Adequate shielding.
• Correct execution of equipotential bonding system, protective grounding
and electrical shielding.
7 Electrical connection Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
7.22 Communication via the Moog Valve and

Pump Configuration Software
CAUTION
Improper handling of the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software causes malfunctions and thus corresponding risks to
people and equipment.
 For safety reasons, the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software must not be used inside a machine
for visualization purposes or as an operator terminal.
CAUTION
running.
CAUTION
Activating valves via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software within a network can give rise to unforeseeable
events if field bus communication takes place simultaneously
between the machine control or other bus nodes!
CAUTION
Messages from the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software can also be received by other bus nodes. This may
trigger unforeseeable events.
7 Electrical connection Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
CAUTION
If danger-free operation of the valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software can also not be ensured with
deactivated field bus communication to the machine control
and other bus nodes, the following must be heeded:
 The valves may only communicate depressurized and in
a direct connection (point-to-point) with the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software.
CAUTION
Data loss!
Data communication between the valve electronics and the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software may be dis-
rupted if other field bus nodes (e.g. a controller) are accessing
the valve electronics at the same time.
 Deactivate the field bus communication for machine control.
Operation of the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software communicates with the
valves via the CAN interface. The CAN interface is either on the service inter-
face X10 or available on the CAN field bus interface X3 and X4.
If the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is operated within a CAN Possible faults
network with field bus communication of the machine running, the following
faults can occur:
• Data exchange with the valve may be disrupted if another device (such as
a controller) accesses the valve simultaneously.
• Node guarding may be activated only if no other field bus node is monitor-
ing the valves via this service.
• Field bus telegrams can also be received by other field bus nodes.
This may trigger off unforeseeable events!
To establish a direct connection between Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software and valve, detach the field bus cable from the valve and connect the
valve directly to the USB CAN interface of the service PC. A 120  ± 10 % ter-
minal resistor is required here.
The configuration/start-up cable not included in the scope of delivery already
features a terminal resistor. This configuration/start-up cable can only be used
outside of areas subject to explosion. The cable can only be used in connec-
tion with the M8-M12 adapter and thus only on the service connector X10.
8 Start-up
8 Start-up
Safety notes: start-up
DANGER
Danger to life!
Operating machines with damaged or defective components or
with a leaking hydraulic system is dangerous and not permitted.
 Before starting up or operating the valve, check the higher-
level machine including all its installed components for
damage and defects.
 Pay particular attention here to higher-level and hydraulic
safety devices such as, for example, EMERGENCY STOP
switches and pressure-limiting valves.
 Report damage or defects to the relevant department
immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately
and secure it.
 Rectify any leaks immediately in accordance with this user
manual, paying particular attention to the notes/instructions
on handling in accordance with safety requirements.
  Chap. "10.3 Trouble shooting", page 158
DANGER
page 18
DANGER
DANGER
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
 The eXLink operating instructions from CEAG are in
the Appendix to this user manual.
DANGER
8 Start-up
DANGER
DANGER
Danger of injury due to electric voltage and unexpected
movements!
DANGER
Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be covered
before start-up.
 The interfaces must be sealed with the original screw plug
belonging to the valve.
8 Start-up
DANGER
Danger of explosion
The unsafe operation of the valves is dangerous.
 Only operate the valve when it is in a safe and functional
state.
 At least once per shift, check the valve for damage visible
from the outside and defects such as leakage or damaged
cables or connectors.
 Report changes, including to the operating behavior,
damage, and defects to the responsible department
and secure it.
 The cable glands must be checked at regularly-prescribed
intervals. For details, see standard DIN EN 60079-17.
DANGER
the machine.
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion
For electrical start-up, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
8 Start-up
WARNING
The operation of the valves at pressure that is too high on the
hydraulic connections can cause injuries and damage to the
machine.
 Pressure-limiting valves or other comparable safety
devices, for example, must be installed to limit the pressure
at all the hydraulic ports to the specified maximum operating
pressure. Maximum operating pressure:
WARNING
Risk of injury!
CAUTION
By changing the configuration of the valves, the functionality
of the valve can be changed so that it causes damage,
malfunction or failure of the valve or machine.
 It is only permitted to alter the valve configuration during
operation if this does not cause any dangerous states in
the machine and in its surroundings.
CAUTION
and on the valves.
page 7
8 Start-up
CAUTION
transportation.
8 Start-up Preparations
8.1 Preparations
The valves may only be started up when the following is ensured: Preparations for start-up
• The higher-level machine with all its installed components complies with the
latest versions of the relevant national and international regulations, stan-
dards and guidelines (such as, for example, the EU Machinery Directive,
the regulations of the trade association and of TÜV or VDE).
• The valves and all the other installed components are in a technically
fault-free and operationally reliable state.
• No signals that can lead to uncontrolled movements in the machine are
transmitted to the valves.
8 Start-up Start-up of the valves
8.2 Start-up of the valves

Procedure: Procedure for start-up
1. Make sure that all the machine components, connections and ports
conform to the specifications of the machine manufacturer and operator.
2. Prepare the hydraulic system.
 Chap. "8.4 Filling and flushing the hydraulic system", page 141
3. Establish the valve hydraulic connection.
 Chap. "6.3 Mounting the valve", page 65
4. Establish the valve electrical connection.
5. Valves with field bus interface:
Connect the valve to the field bus.
6. Make sure that all the mechanical and electrical connections and hydrau-
lic ports are correctly established. Follow operating instructions for the
ex-proof plug connector!
7. Make sure that the valve is correctly configured, or carry out configuration.
 Chap. "8.3 Configuration of the valves", page 136
8. Start-up of the hydraulic system.
 Chap. "8.5 Start-up of the hydraulic system", page 142
9. If necessary, correct the zero position parameters in the valve software.
The parameters can be set or interrogated via the service or field bus
interface in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed
for example with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
8.3 Configuration of the valves

Safety instructions:
CAUTION
configuration of
Danger of personal injury and damage to property! the valves
8 Start-up Configuration of the valves
CAUTION
The selected settings must be documented after the configura-
tion of the valves has been altered.
The settings can be documented for example with the Moog
 After a valve has been repaired or replaced, the user must
transfer the settings again to the repaired or new valve
because repaired or replacement valves are like new valves
delivered with factory settings.
  Chap. "8.3.3 Factory setting of the valves", page 140
  Chap. "10.4 Repair", page 162
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is available as an accessory

to simplify start-up, diagnosis and configuration of the valves.
8.3.1 Configuration via the field bus interface

Valves with field bus interfaces are started up, activated, monitored and config- Configuration of
ured via the field bus interface (connectors X3 and X4). the valves via the
field bus interface
8.3.1.1 Configuration with the machine controller

To be able to configure the valves with the machine controller, it is necessary Configuration with
to connect the valve to the machine controller via the field bus. the machine controller
8.3.1.2 Configuration with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software communicates with the Configuration with
valves via the CAN bus interface. The CAN bus interface is either on the the Moog Valve and Pump
service interface X10 or available on the CAN field bus interface X3 and X4. Configuration Software
 Chap. "7.22 Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software", page 128
8.3.2 Configuration via the service interface

Valves without CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via Configuration of
the service interface (service connector-X10) with the Moog Valve and Pump the valves via the
Configuration Software. service interface
DANGER
page 18
suitable for use in hazardous areas.
On request, the service interface is available in an explosion-proof
model.
The following are required to be able to configure the valves with the Moog
Valve and Pump Configuration Software via the service interface (service
connector -X10):
• USB start-up module for the use in hazardous areas not allowed
• Configuration/start-up cable
• Adapter for service connector X10 for use in hazardous areas not
allowed, optional available with Ex-protected plug connector
• PC with installed Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
USB start-up module, configuration/start-up cable, adapter, and

Moog Valve Configuration Software are available as accessories.
To be able to configure the valves via the service interface, it is necessary to

connect the valve as follows to the PC with installed Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software:
Service connector X10 USB port Connection of the valve

to a PC via the service
Adapter for USB start-up
interface (X10)
Valve service connec- Configuration/ module PC
tor X10 start-up cable
Safe area
Fig. 64: Connection of the valve to a PC via the service interface (service connector X10)
8.3.3 Factory setting of the valves

The valve is delivered from the factory with preset parameters. This presetting Factory setting of
corresponds to the factory setting of the valves. the valves
Depending on the valve type and model, it may be necessary to adapt the
parameters for the pressure controller to the respective application.
If the valve is to be incorporated in a field bus, it may also be necessary to
adapt the communication parameters.
Please contact Moog or one of its authorized service centers for

information on the factory setting parameters.
8.3.4 Storing of parameters

Modified parameters are initially stored in the volatile memory of the valve Volatile memory
electronics microprocessor system, i.e. they are lost if the power supply is
interrupted. When the power supply is restored, the parameters that were
stored last are again available.
The microprocessor system also has a non-volatile memory. In order to store Non-volatile memory
the modified parameters in this memory, it is necessary to send a memory
command to the valve. If the power supply is interrupted, the modified valve
configuration will again be available after the supply is restored.
8 Start-up Filling and flushing the hydraulic system
8.4 Filling and flushing the hydraulic system
WARNING
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health when
flushing the hydraulic system, please observe the following
notes.
 If a switching valve is fitted to flush the hydraulic system,
this must not cause any potentially dangerous states in
the machine.
Procedure: Procedure for filling and

flushing the hydraulic
1. Depressurize the hydraulic system.
system
2. Fill the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of the manu-
facturer and the operator of the machine.
Since new hydraulic fluid is impure, the hydraulic system must be filled
using a fill filter with a filter fineness of at least 10  75 (10 µm absolute).
3. Replace existing filter elements with flushing elements in accordance with
the instructions of the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
4. Remove the servo valve.
 Chap. "10.1 Removing of the valves", page 155
5. Instead of the servo valve, you must install a flushing plate or, if allowed
by the hydraulic system, a switching valve.
Use the flushing plate to flush lines P and T.
The switching valve can also be used to flush the actuator with
lines A and B.
The flushing plates are not included in the valve scope of delivery.
They are available as an accessory.
8 Start-up Start-up of the hydraulic system
6. Carefully flush the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of

the manufacturer and the operator of the machine. Observe the following
when doing so:
- In order to obtain the best possible flushing effect, make sure the
hydraulic fluid reaches operating temperature.
- Observe the minimum flushing time t:
V
t = 5  --------  h 
Q
V [l] : Tank capacity
Q [l/min] : Pump delivery
- End the flushing process when at least the cleanliness level as spec-
ified in 18/15/12 ISO 4406 is achieved.
7. Depressurize the hydraulic system.
8. Replace flushing elements with suitable filter elements in accordance with
the instructions of the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
9. Remove the flushing plate or switching valve.
10. Mount the servo valve.
8.5 Start-up of the hydraulic system

Procedure: Procedure for start-up
of the hydraulic
1. Start-up the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of the
system
manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
2. Vent the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of the

manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
3. Vent the valve (only for D639K).
It may be necessary to repeat the procedure.
4. Check the hydraulic system for external leaks.
8.5.1 Venting
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Air trapped in the hydraulic system, particularly in the case of
high pressure peaks in the system, can cause a diesel effect.
If the trapped air bubbles are compressed very quickly and thus
heated, this can cause the mixture to self-ignite. This gives rise
to a very high increase in pressure and temperature locally,
which in turn can result in damage in the hydraulic system,
e.g. to gaskets or components, causing the oil to age more
quickly.
 In order to avoid diesel effects, the hydraulic system must
be ventilated.
8 Start-up Start-up of the hydraulic system
8.5.1.1 Tool required

The following tool is required for venting the valve: Required tool for venting
• Torque wrench for 5 WAF hexagon socket screws the valves
8.5.1.2 Venting the valve and the actuator
WARNING
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health when
venting the hydraulic system, please observe the following
notes.
 The valve and actuator may only be vented at a low system
pressure of max. 10 bar (145 psi).
Procedure: Procedure for venting the

valve and the actuator
1. A low system pressure of max. 10 bar (145 psi) must be applied.
2. Input valve command signals so that the pressure-controlled port is pres-
surized with system pressure.
3. Carefully open the venting screw by approx. one revolution.
Position of the venting screw:  Fig. 1, page 18
4. Wait until no additional air escapes or until the escaping hydraulic fluid
contains no additional air bubbles.
5. If necessary, tighten venting screw with torque wrench for hexagon socket
head cap screws WS 5.
Tightening torque of the venting screw: 15 Nm / 11 lbf ft.
Higher tightening torques can result in the destruction of the sealing ring
for the venting screw.
6. Remove the escaped hydraulic fluid.
7. If the actuator is higher than the valve, the actuator must likewise be
vented at the highest point.
9 Operation
9 Operation
Safety notes: Operation
DANGER
Danger to life!
damage and defects.
and secure it.
DANGER
movements!
DANGER
Failure to heed the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG
can cause bodily injuries and property damage.
 Follow the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG in
 Handle all ex-protected connectors according to the notes
and instructions in the eXLink operating instructions from
CEAG
9 Operation
DANGER
state.
 At least once per shift, check valve for damage visible from
the outside and defects such as leakage or damaged cables
or connectors.
and secure it.
DANGER
The unsafe operation of the valves is dangerous and not
permitted.
 Open connectors for the interfaces are not permitted and
must absolutely be covered before start-up.
correctly according to the instructions in the "Ex plug
connector eXLink" operating instructions. Here the
instructions and notes in the operating instructions for the
connectors must be heeded.
 Only use the service connector X10 in the M8 mode, 3-pin
outside the hazardous area.
 For a configuration of the valve within the area subject to
explosion, on request there is the X10 interface with an
appropriate Ex-protected plug connector.
DANGER
Danger of explosion due to impermissible heating up of
the valve!
As a result of insufficient ventilation of the valve or deposits on
the valve, the impermissible heating up of the valve can be
such that the maximum temperatures of the certified tempera-
ture classes are exceeded.
 The valves must be checked regularly, cleaned if
necessary. Deposits on the valve must be removed.
 If necessary inform the responsible person immediately and
remove the valve from electrical and hydraulic operation.
9 Operation
WARNING
During operation, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us
or to one of our authorized service centers immediately.
WARNING
Risk of injury!
CAUTION
CAUTION
In addition, to avoid damage or leaks, perform the following
tasks at regular intervals in accordance with the instructions of
the manufacturer and the operator of the machine:
 Checking the valve and the hydraulic system for externally
identifiable damage and defects.
 Checking for loose plugs/connectors.
 Checking the cleanliness level of the hydraulic fluid.
 Checking the port O-rings for elasticity, integrity and correct
seating.
  Chap. "10.2.1 Checking and replacing the port O-rings",
page 157
9 Operation Preparations for operation
CAUTION
running.
CAUTION
and on the valves.
page 7
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
9.1 Preparations for operation

The valves may only be operated as a component part of a higher-level overall Preparations for
system, for example in a machine. valve operation
 Chap. "2 Safety", page 14
The following must be completed before the valve is operated:
• Qualified project planning
• Correct start-up and configuration of the valve
 Chap. "8 Start-up", page 130
9 Operation Operation of the valve
9.2 Operation of the valve

The valve is activated via signals that it receives from the machine controller. Operation of the valve:
activation via signals from
Direct interventions by the user on the valve during normal operation are the machine controller
not necessary. The valve has no controls, such as e.g. switches or
buttons, which must be actuated.
The device may only be operated in a safe and functional state. Here, the
following points must be heeded:
• At least once per shift, check valve for damage visible from the outside
and defects such as leakage or damaged cables or connectors.
• Report changes, including those in the operating behavior, as well as
functional faults to the responsible person or office.
• Shut the machine to down immediately and secure.
• Remedy faults immediately.
The transition of the valve into standby or into fail-safe state can also be
triggered by appropriate signals on the enable input of the valve connector X1:
• Signals between 8.5 V and 32 V based on GND at the enable input switch
the valve to standby.
• Signals lower than 6.5 V at the enable input switch the valve to fail-safe
state in the mechanical or electrical fail-safe state depending on the model
(only for p or Q valves).
Information on maintenance:
 Chap. "10.2 Maintenance", page 156
Information on correcting possible faults:
 Chap. "10.3 Trouble shooting", page 158
9 Operation Shutting down the valve
9.3 Shutting down the valve

Safety notes: Shutting
DANGER
down the valve
Danger to life!
Hydraulic pressure and electrical supply voltage are still nor-
mally applied after the valve has been shut down. The machine
is not automatically put out of operation when the valve is shut
down.
DANGER
DANGER
movements!
9 Operation Shutting down the valve
The valve can be shut down as follows: Shutting down the valve
• Switching off of the supply voltage
• Adoption by the valve of the 'DISABLED' and 'INIT' valve states
• Signal at the enable input of valve connector X1
If necessary, the valve must be restarted after it has been shut down or has
entered the fail-safe state.
10 Service
10 Service
Safety notes: Service
DANGER
Danger to life!
damage and defects.
and secure it.
DANGER
DANGER
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
 The eXLink operating instructions from CEAG are in
DANGER
DANGER
10 Service
DANGER
Danger of explosion due to impermissible heating up of
the valve!
As a result of insufficient ventilation of the valve or deposits on
the valve, the impermissible heating up of the valve can be
such that the maximum temperatures of the certified tempera-
ture classes are exceeded.
 The valves must be checked regularly, cleaned if
necessary. Deposits on the valve must be removed.
 If necessary inform the responsible person immediately and
remove the valve from electrical and hydraulic operation.
DANGER
movements!
DANGER
page 18
10 Service
DANGER
state.
 At least once per shift, check valve for damage visible from
the outside and defects such as leakage or damaged cables
or connectors.
and secure it.
WARNING
Risk of injury!
WARNING
During shut-down, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us
or to one of our authorized service centers immediately.
CAUTION
  Chap. "12 Accessories and spare parts", page 173
 Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage
to property are among other things excluded if they are
caused by the use of unsuitable or defective accessories
or unsuitable or defective spare parts.
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
The plugs, connectors, and connection cables of the valves
may not be used for other purposes, such as for stepping on or
as transport holders.
10 Service
CAUTION
and on the valves.
page 7.
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the accessories:
 Due to the complexity of the internal components of the
valves and of accessories, only we or our authorized service
centers may make repairs and perform maintenance work
other than that explained in this user manual.
 The plugs, connectors, and connection cables of the valves
may not be used for other purposes, such as for stepping on
or as transport holders.
to property are excluded among other things if they are
caused by unauthorized repairs or other unauthorized
interventions.
 Structural changes to or opening of explosion-proof valves
are not permitted since these invalidate the ex certification.
10 Service Removing of the valves
10.1 Removing of the valves

The following tools and materials are required for removing the valves: Tools and materials
• For removing and mounting the valve required for removal
Torque wrench for 5 WAF hexagon socket screws
• Shipping plate and associated fastening elements
• For mounting the shipping plate
Regular screwdriver 8x1.6 [mm] and if necessary wrench WS 10
CAUTION
Failure to heed the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG
can cause bodily injuries and property damage.
 Follow the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG in
 Handle all ex-proof connectors according to the notes and
instructions in the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG
The installation screws and the O-rings to be replaced if necessary

are not included in the scope of delivery for the valves. They are
available as an accessory.
10 Service Maintenance
10.1.2 Removing
Safety notes: Removing
CAUTION
the valves
transportation.
Procedure: Procedure for removing

the valve
1. Shut down and switch off the machine and place in a de-energized and
depressurized state.
For the removal of the ex-protected connectors, the notes and in-
structions for the eXLink operating instructions of CEAG must be
heeded.
The eXLink operating instructions from CEAG are in the Appendix
to this user manual.
2. Disconnect the Ex-protected connectors.
3. Release the valve's installation screws.
4. Remove the valve from the mounting surface.
6. Replace hardened and damaged O-rings with new O-rings.
7. Mount the shipping plate on the valve's hydraulic connection.
Tightening torque of the attachment screws: approx. 5 Nm / 3.7 lbf ft
(hand-tight)
8. If the valve is not to be immediately reused or is to be serviced: keep valve
in original packaging.
 Chap. "5 Transportation and Storage", page 58
9. If necessary, seal the ports of the hydraulic system to prevent the hydrau-
lic fluid from being contaminated.
10.2 Maintenance
Changes in temperature, effects of the hydraulic fluid, such as, for example, Embrittlement of
pressure peaks, and similar influences can, depending on the application, the gasket materials
expose the sealing materials to different levels of wear. This may, in turn,
cause leaks.
In order to avoid possible resulting impairments or damage, we recommend
that the valve, after a period of storage or operation of more than 5 years, be
inspected by us or one of our authorized service centers.
10 Service Maintenance
WARNING
Risk of damage!
 Maintenance work on ex-protected valves may only be
performed by us or our authorized service centers.
 With the intervention of third parties, the ex certification
becomes invalid.
If the valve is exposed to high loads, it may be necessary to reduce

the check/inspection interval to suit the application.
10.2.1 Checking and replacing the port O-rings

10.2.1.1 Tools and materials required
The following are required for checking and replacing the port O-rings: Tools and materials
• For removing and mounting the valve required for checking and
Torque wrench for 5 WAF hexagon socket screws replacing the O-rings
 Chap. "12.2 Spare parts", page 175
10.2.1.2 checking and replacing the O-rings

Procedure: Procedure for checking
and replacing the O-rings
1. Remove the valve.
 Chap. "10.1 Removing of the valves", page 155
3. Replace hardened and damaged O-rings with new O-rings.
4. Remount the valve.
10 Service Trouble shooting
10.2.2 Monitoring the pressure transducer drift

10.3 Trouble shooting

The following faults may occur: Possible faults
• Leak at the valve connecting surface
 Chap. "10.3.1.1 Leak at the valve connecting surface", page 159
• leak at the linear force motor screw plug
 Chap. "10.3.1.2 Leak at the linear force motor screw plug", page 159
• leak at the venting screw
 Chap. "10.3.1.3 Leak at the venting screw", page 159
• No hydraulic response by the valve
 Chap. "10.3.2 No hydraulic response by the valve", page 160
• Instability of the control loops
 Chap. "10.3.3 Instability of the external control loop", page 161
 Chap. "10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops", page 161
If the fault cannot be corrected by means of the measures set out

below, please contact us or one of our authorized service centers.
After correcting the fault, if necessary reinstall and restart the valve. Restarting after correcting
 Chap. "6.3 Mounting the valve", page 65 the fault
10.3.1 Leaks
10.3.1.1 Leak at the valve connecting surface
Measures: Leak at the valve
• Check that O-rings in the valve ports (A, B, P, T, etc.) are present and for connecting surface
If necessary, install O-rings, replace or correct the seating.
• Check the valve's mounting and connecting surfaces, the valve and the
hydraulic system for damage, contamination and evenness.
• Check installation screws for secure and correct seating.
If necessary, tighten screws with torque wrench for hexagon socket head
cap screws.
The wrench sizes of the hexagon socket cap head screws for
mounting are type series-specific.
Details about fastening screws and their tightening torque:
 Tab. 7, Seite 65
10.3.1.2 Leak at the linear force motor screw plug
CAUTION
 In the event of a leak at the linear force motor screw plug,
have the valve check by Moog or one of its authorized
service centers.
10.3.1.3 Leak at the venting screw

Measures: Leak at the venting
• Check that the sealing ring on the venting screw is present and for elastic- screw
ity, integrity and correct seating.
If necessary, install the sealing ring, replace or correct the seating.
• Check the venting screws for secure and correct seating.
If necessary, tighten screws with torque wrench for hexagon socket head
cap screws WS 5.
Tightening torque of the venting screw: 6 Nm / 4.4 lbf ft.
Higher tightening torques can result in the destruction of the sealing ring
for the venting screw.
• Check the valve's mounting and connecting surfaces, the valve and the
hydraulic system for damage, contamination and evenness.
10.3.2 No hydraulic response by the valve
DANGER
Danger to life!
Touching electrically live parts can cause electric shock.
 Touching electrically live parts must therefore be avoided.
Measures: No hydraulic response

• Check whether all the machine components, connections and ports by the valve
conform to the specifications of the machine manufacturer and operator.
To do so, on the valves compare the data on the nameplate with the spec-
ifications.
• Check whether the hydraulic installation is correct and whether all the
hydraulic ports are correctly established.
• Check whether hydraulic pressure is present.
• Check whether the supply voltage is present.
• Check whether the connectors are correctly attached and non-corroded.
• Check whether there is a command signal failure or a faulty electric cable.
• Check whether the desired signals are applied at the connector, in partic-
ular at the enable input.
• Check whether the command signal is analog or applied via the field bus
interface (depending on the model).
• Check whether the valve is in a fault state.
If necessary, correct the fault and then cancel the fault via the field bus or
reset the valve by switching the supply voltage off and then on again.
Typical fault causes:
- Supply voltage dips below 18 V
 Chap. "11.5 Electrical data", page 171
- Maximum permissible temperature exceeded
 Chap. "11.2 General technical data", page 168
- Control error (for example, due to the spool sticking, which can be
caused for instance by contamination)
- No command signal (e.g., due to cable break)
• Check whether the enable signal is applied (only for Q valve). If there is no
enable, the valve cannot be put in the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• Check whether the configuration of the internal valve software is correct.
10.3.3 Instability of the external control loop

Measures: Instability of the external
• Check whether the external control loop is stable. control loop
If necessary, reduce control loop gain.
• Check whether the internal valve control loops are stable.
 Chap. "10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops", page 161
• Check whether the controlled system was modified.
10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops

10.3.4.1 Flow control
Measures: Instability of the internal
• Check whether the signal quality of the command signals is sufficient. valve control loops: flow
function
• Check whether the system pressure is stable.
• Check whether the quality and purity of the hydraulic fluid used conforms
to the specifications of the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
• Check whether the valve is operational.
To do this, perform a comparison of the command/actual value signals.
10.3.4.2 Pressure control

Measures: Instability of the internal
• Check whether the signal quality of the command signals is sufficient. valve control loops:
pressure function
• Check whether the system pressure is stable.
• Vent the valve or the hydraulic system.
• Optimize the control loop gain of the pressure controller by adapting the
parameters (P, I, D, etc.).
 Chap. "3.3.5 Notes on the pressure controller control response
(D639K)", page 38
• Check whether the quality and purity of the hydraulic fluid used conforms
to the specifications of the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
• Check whether the valve is operational.
To do so, switch to flow control (Q-control) via the integrated service or
field bus interface and perform a comparison of the command and actual
value signals.
• Check whether the pressure controlled system has been modified.
• Check whether the pressure in T is below the pressure to be controlled.
10 Service Repair
10.4 Repair
Safety notes:
CAUTION
Repair/corrective
Danger of personal injury and damage to property! maintenance
Repaired valves or replacement valves are, like new valves,
delivered with the factory settings. In the event of a repair job
for defective valves, we and our authorized service centers
shall not accept liability for software and data installed by the
customer.
 Check the valves for correct mechanical design and correct
configuration before start-up.
CAUTION
Maintenance work by the user on explosion proof valves is not

permitted. Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex
certification.
Moog Global Support™ provides professional repair and corrective mainte- Moog Global Support
nance services on the highest level thanks to our experienced technicians. Our
customer service and our professional expertise ensure that your systems will
always remain in an optimal state. Here we offer the reliability that you can only
expect from leading manufacturers with worldwide branch offices.
MOOG Global Support

Logo
Fig. 65: MOOG Global Support Logo
10 Service Repair
WARNING
Risk of damage!
 Maintenance work on ex-protected valves may only be
performed by us or our authorized service centers.
 With the intervention of third parties, the ex certification
becomes invalid.
Your advantages:
• Shorter downtimes, critical systems can be operated permanently with
high performance
• Investment security thanks to reliability, adaptability, and guaranteed life
span of our products
• Optimized corrective maintenance planning ans system set-up
• Use of our flexible corrective maintenance program according to your
service requirements
Our service offerings:

• Repair with original parts by trained technicians according to the latest
Moog specifications
• Provision of original spare parts and products in order to avoid unplanned
downtimes
• Flexible programs according to your needs for preventative corrective
maintenance and set-up thanks to annual or multi-year contracts
• On-site service for start-up, set-up, and fault diagnosis
• Reliable service with equally good quantity worldwide
For additional information about Moog Global Support™, visit

http://www.moog.com/industrial/service
Maintenance work and repairs by users of Ex protection valves are not

allowed. This is because with intervention by third parties, the Ex certification is
invalidated!
In the event of a repair job for defective valves, we and our autho-
rized service centers reserve the right to perform a repair or, after
consultation, alternatively to supply replacement valves with an
identical or compatible equipment specification.
11 Technical Data
11 Technical Data
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the machine
 Do not immerse the valves in liquids.
11 Technical Data Nameplates
11.1 Nameplates
Nameplate

1 Model number  Chap. "11.1.1 Model number", page 167
2 Type designation  Chap. "1.2 Supplemental documents", page 5
3 Serial number
4 Maximum operating pressure  Chap. "11.3 Hydraulic data", page 169
5 Not assigned
6 Signal type for analog  Chap. "3.4.1 Signal types for analog command
command inputs inputs", page 40
7 Power supply Technical data:
 Chap. "11.5 Electrical data", page 171
 Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1",
page 76
8 Optional customer-specific
designation
9 Optional version identification
10 Date of manufacture in
MM/YY format
11 LSS address (decimal)  Chap. "11.1.2 LSS address (Layer Setting Services)",
page 167
12 Hydraulic symbol
13 Data matrix code  Chap. "11.1.3 Data matrix code", page 167
14 Designation of ports  Chap. "6.2.2 Mounting pattern of mounting surface",
page 64
Fig. 66: Nameplate (example)
Ex nameplate

1 Series
2 Power supply
3 Current consumption
4 Temperature class T5
5 Identification
6 Certification
7 Ambient temperature TA for temperature class from item 4
8 Fluid temperature Toil for temperature class from item 4
Fig. 67: Ex nameplate (example)
The ambient and fluid temperatures may not exceed the values of
the respective temperature classes.
The type designation and the signal type for analog command
inputs on the nameplate indicate the valve's delivery status.
The signal type can be set via the service or field bus interface in
the valve software and therefore it is possible to change the valve
in such a way that it no longer conforms to this status.
11.1.1 Model number

The model number is set out as follows: Model number
D637          
Variant
Optional factory identification
Model
Specification status: K: Ex protected variant
Series
Example: D637K-1007-0001
11.1.2 LSS address (Layer Setting Services)

The decimal LSS address is set out in accordance with CiA DSP 305 as LSS address
follows and serves to provide the CAN bus node with an internationally unique
identification:
Serial number without country

40 / Product code / Version without leading zeros /
identification
 Chap. "11.1.1 Model number",  Fig. 66, page 165, item 3
Manufacturer ID page 167
Example: 40/424/1/4321
Even valves without CAN bus interfaces are assigned a decimal

LSS address during manufacturing.
11.1.3 Data matrix code

The data matrix code is a two-dimensional code. The code on the nameplate Data matrix code
contains a character string that is set out as follows:
Serial number with

Model number # Optional version identification #
country identification
 Chap. "11.1.1 Model  Fig. 66, page 165, item 7  Fig. 66, page 165, item 3
number", page 167
If there is no optional version identification, a blank space appears here.
Example: D637K 1007-0001#A#D4321
11 Technical Data General technical data
11.2 General technical data
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the machine
 Do not immerse the valves in liquids.
Version servo valve General technical data

Dimensions  Chap. "6.1 Dimensions (installation drawings)", page 63
Installation In any position, fixed or moving; on valves with venting screws (D639K):
position venting screw must point upward
Observe the relevant safety instructions when mounting the valve.
 Chap. "6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System", page 61
Permissible Ambient temperature 1
ambient
For transportation/ recom- 15 °C to 25 °C (59 to 77 °F) 2
conditions storage mended
permissi- –40 °C to 80 °C 2
ble
For operation (–40 ° on request) –20 ° to 60 ° depending
on the certified temperature classes
Rel. air humidity for storage < 65 % not condensing
Vibration resistance 3 10 g, 3 axes, frequency: 10 to 2,000 Hz
(according to DIN EN 60068-2-6)
Shock resistance 3 50 g, 6 directions, half-sine 3 ms
(according to DIN EN 60068-2-27)
Tab. 24: General technical data
1 The ambient temperature and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid influence the temperature of
the valve electronics. In order to ensure that the electronic components integrated in the valve
last as long as possible, we recommend that the hydraulic fluid be kept at as low a temperature
as possible at as low an ambient temperature as possible. A reference temperature is measured
in the valve electronics. Fault-free operation is guaranteed up to a reference temperature of
85 °C (185 °F). At reference temperatures over 85 °C (185°F) a warning is output via the field
bus on valves with field bus interfaces. At reference temperatures over 105 °C (221°F) the valve
electronics are deactivated; the valve adopts the 'DISABLED' valve status and thus the mechan-
ical fail-safe state.
2 Temperature fluctuations > 10 °C must be avoided during storage.
3 Transportation and storage should be as vibration- and shock-free as possible.
11 Technical Data Hydraulic data
11.3 Hydraulic data

The cleanness of the hydraulic fluid greatly influences the
functional safety (safe positioning of the spool, high resolution) and
the wear (control land, pressure gain, leakage losses) of the
valves. To avoid malfunctions and increased wear, we recommend
that the hydraulic fluid be filtered accordingly.
Valve construction type Gate valve, one-stage, with bushing D637K-R and D639K-R, spool in valve body D637K-P and
D639K-P
Actuation/drive Directly with permanent magnet linear force motor
Control oil supply None
Nominal size and mounting NG10, hole pattern according to ISO 4401-05-05-0-05, with or without leakage port Y
pattern  Chap. "3.3.3 Leakage port Y", page 36
 Chap. "6.2.2 Mounting pattern of mounting surface", page 64
Diameter of ports 11.5 mm
 Chap. "6.2.2 Mounting pattern of mounting surface", page 64
Gasket material NBR, FKM, others on request
Valve configurations 2-way, 3-way, 4-way and 2x2-way operation
 Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 35
Overlap Zero overlap, less than ±3 % or ±10 % positive overlap (model-dependent) zero overlap not for
D637K-P/D639K-P
Max. flow Qmax 180 l/min (0.9 gpm)  Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 51
Rated flow QN 60/80/100 l/min (model-dependent) (for pN = 35 bar per control edge: tolerance ±10 %), 80l/min
for D63xK-P with leakage oil 3l/min
Max. leakage flow QL1 1.2/2 l/min (model-dependent)
Maximum operating pressure Ports P and B 350 bar (5,075 psi)
Port A (for D637K) 350 bar (5,075 psi)
Port A (for D639K) Dependent on pressure transducer, max. 350 bar (5,075 psi)
 Chap. "11.3.1 Pressure range identification", page 170
Port T, T1 without Y 50 bar (725 psi)  Chap. "3.3.3 Leakage port Y", page 36
Port T, T1 with Y 350 bar (5,075 psi)
Port Y Depressurized to tank
Linearity of pressure control < 0.5 % of the maximum operating pressure in port A
(only for D639-R)  Chap. "11.3.1 Pressure range identification", page 170
Hydraulic fluid Permissible fluids Mineral-oil-based hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524-1 to DIN 51524-3
Other fluids on request
Permissible temperature 2 (–40 ° on request) –20 ° to 80 ° depending on the certified
temperature classes
Viscosity  recommended 15 to 100 mm²/s
permissible 5 to 400 mm²/s
Cleanliness level, for functional safety < 18/15/12
recommended for life cycle (wear ) < 17/14/11
(ISO 4406)
Tab. 25: Hydraulic data
1 Typical values (measured at operating pressure pP = 140 bar, viscosity of the hydraulic fluid  = 32 mm2/s and temperature of
the hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C)
2 The ambient temperature and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid influence the temperature of the valve electronics. In order to
ensure that the electronic components integrated in the valve last as long as possible, we recommend that the hydraulic fluid be kept at
as low a temperature as possible at as low an ambient temperature as possible. A reference temperature is measured in the valve
electronics. Fault-free operation is guaranteed up to a reference temperature of 85 °C (185 °F). At reference temperatures over 85 °C
(185°F) a warning is output via the field bus on valves with field bus interfaces. At reference temperatures over 105 °C (221°F) the
valve electronics are deactivated; the valve adopts the 'DISABLED' valve status and thus the mechanical fail-safe state.
11 Technical Data Static and dynamic data
11.3.1 Pressure range identification

The pressure range identification, i.e. the 3rd position in the valve type desig- Pressure range
nation, indicates what maximum operating pressure is permissible in port A. identification
Type designation:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
                  
Pressure range identification
Series
D637K D639K
Ident. Maximum operating pressure in port A Q p pQ
W 25 bar (363 psi)  
V 100 bar (1,450 psi)  
U 160 bar (2,320 psi)  
T 250 bar (3,625 psi)  
K 350 bar (5,075 psi)   
X Special version  
Tab. 26: Pressure range identification in the type designation
The pressure controlled with a pressure command of 100 % in port A can,

depending on the application, deviate from the maximum operating pressure
and be set by the customer.
11.4 Static and dynamic data

Step response time for 15 ms for D63xK-R Static and dynamic data
0 to 100 % spool stroke1 20 ms for D63xK-P (in the Q-function)
 Chap. "4.4 Step response and frequency response",
page 54
Hysteresis 1 in Q-control < 0.05 %, max. 0.1 %
in p-control depending on controller optimization
Zero shift (typical) < 1.5 % for T = 55 K (in the Q-function)
Tab. 27: Static and dynamic data
1 Typical values (measured at operating pressure pP = 140 bar, viscosity of the hydraulic fluid
 = 32 mm2/s and temperature of the hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C)
11 Technical Data Electrical data
11.5 Electrical data

Protection type IP65 with mounted mating connectors or with mounted dust protection Electrical data
caps with sealing function (as per EN 60529)
EMC protection Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2:2005 (evaluation criterion A)
requirements With SELV/PELV power supply (item number: D137-003-001):
Immunity to interference as per EN 55011:2003
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN bus and
Profibus DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT)
Supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18–32 V) DC based on GND.
Only use SELV-/PELV power supply as per EN 60204-1
At supply voltages less than 18 V, the valve is rendered in the fail-safe
state.
External fuse 3.15 A slow-blowing fuse
protection for
each valve
Duty cycle 100 %
Valve connec- 7-pin connector with pin contacts
tor X1  Chap. "7.4 Connector X1", page 76
Power Pmin (motor in neutral position) 9.6 W at I = 0.4 A 1
consumption Pmax (at max. flow) 67.2 W
at Imax = 2.8 A 1
(for valves with QN = 60 l/min)
36 W at Imax = 2.5 A 1
(for valves D637K-R and D639K-R
with QN = 100 l/min)
Inputs/outputs Command input 0–10 V RIn = 20 k
Command input ±10 V RIn = 20 k
Command input 0–10 mA Rin = 200 
Command input ±10 mA Rin = 200 
Command input 4–20 mA Rin = 200 
Actual value output 4–20 mA RL = 0–500  to GND
Enable input Signals between 8.5 V and 32 V based
on GND at the enable input switch the
valve to standby.
Signals lower than 6.5 V at the enable
input switch the valve to fail-safe state in
the mechanical or electrical fail-safe state
depending on the model.
 Chap. "3.4.3 Digital enable input",
page 48
Tab. 28: Electrical data
1 Power consumption I and Imax measured at ambient temperature TU = 25 °C and supply voltage
U = 24 V DC
11 Technical Data Electrical data
11.5.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

The valves fulfill the EMC protective requirements for immunity to interference Electromagnetic
as per EN 61000-6-2:2005 (assessment criterion A). compatibility (EMC)
SELV/PELV power supply (item number: D137-003-001) as power supply fulfill
the vales the protective requirements for immunity to interference as per
EN 55011:2003.
Only use SELV/PELV power supply!
The valves fulfill the EMC protective requirements for immunity to interference
as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN-bus and Profibus DP) and as per
EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT).
The following technical requirements must be in place so that the EMC protection
requirements can be satisfied:
• Use of the mating connectors recommended for the valves
• Adequate shielding
• Execution of equipotential bonding system, protective grounding and
electrical shielding as per "TN 353"
12 Accessories and spare parts Accessories
12 Accessories and spare parts

CAUTION
  Chap. "12 Accessories and spare parts", page 173
to property are among other things excluded if they are
caused by the use of unsuitable or defective accessories
or unsuitable or defective spare parts.
12.1 Accessories
The accessories are Not included in scope of delivery
 Chap. "5.2 Scope of delivery of the valve", page 60
Cables of the connector cable that are not used must be insulated
or insulated and placed in the control cabinet.
Number
Item designation required Description Item number
Service sealing set 1 Set NBR 90 Shore B95215-N681-10
(contains all the O-rings for ports A, B, P, T, T1 and Y and 1 Set FKM 90 Shore B95215-V681-10
O-ring recess X)
Flushing plates
for ports P, A, B, T, T1, X, Y 1 B67728-001
for ports P, T, T1, and X, Y 1 B67728-002
for ports P, T, T1, X, Y 1 B67728-003
Connecting plates on request

Installation screws 4 M6x40 (D637K-P/D639K-P) A03665-060-040
Hexagon socket head cap screw as per
EN ISO 4762, quality class: 10.9, tightening
torque: 11 Nm ± 10 % / 8 lbf ft +/- 10 %
Installation screws 4 M6x60 (D637K-R/D639K-R) A03665-060-060
Hexagon socket head cap screw as per
EN ISO 4762, quality class: 10.9, tightening
torque: 11 Nm ± 10 % / 8 lbf ft +/- 10 %
Tab. 29: Accessories (Part 1 of 3)
12 Accessories and spare parts Accessories
Number
Adapter cable M8-M12, 2 m 1 C40934-001
(not approved for hazardous area)
USB start-up module 1 C43094-001
(for service connector X10 not approved
for hazardous area)
Configuration/start-up cable, 2 m (not approved for 1 TD3999-137
hazardous area)
SELV/PELV power supply 1 D137-003-001
(24 V DC voltage, 10 A not approved for hazardous
area)
Power supply cord, 2 m 1 B95924-002
(not approved for hazardous area)
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software 1 on request
Supplementing documents
Manual: on request
"Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software", German
Manual: on request
"Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software", English
TN 4904 1 Permissible lengths for electrical connection CA48851
lines from valves with integrated electronics
TN 353 1 Potential equalization and protective ground- CA58437
ing for hydraulic valves with integrated elec-
tronics
TN 502 1 Valves with EtherCAT interface CA566678
User manual for Digital Interface Valves with 1 Valves with EtherCAT interface CDS33722-en
EtherCAT Interface
Firmware B9926-DV013-B-211
Documents can be found and downloaded by specifying the item number:
German-language documents a http://www.moog.de/german/about-moog-inc/industrial-group-literature-library/
English-language documents at http://www.moog.com/industrial/literature
Mating connector X1 1 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22154-001
Mating connector X2 1 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22150-001
Mating connector CAN X3, X4 2 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22142-001
Mating connector Profibus X3, X4 2 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22145-001
Mating connector Ethercat X3, X4 2 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22152-001
Mating connector X5, X6, X7 3 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22148-001
Connection cable X1 1 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink, CB22155-001
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
Connection cable X2 1 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink, CB22151-001
Connection cable CAN X3, X4 2 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink, CB22346-001
With integrated terminal resistor - this cable
can only be used to connect the last valve
in the field bus chain
12 Accessories and spare parts Spare parts
Number
This cable must be used if 24 V supply
should be looped over the CAN bus. The
terminal resistor must be effected externally
Connection cable Profibus X3, X4 2 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink, CB22146-001
Connection cable Profibus X3, X4 1 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink, CB22147-001
With integrated terminal resistor - this cable
can only be used to connect the last valve
in the field bus chain
Connection cable Ethercat X3, X4 2 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink, CB22153-001
Connection cable X5, X6, X7 3 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink, CB22149-001
The PDF files of the supplementing documents can be downloaded

from the following link:
12.2 Spare parts

Number
O-rings
for ports A, B, P, T and T1 5 ID 12.4 x dia. 1.8 NBR 90 Shore -45122-004
[mm] (0.49 x 0.07 in) FKM 90 Shore -42082-004
for port Y and O-ring recess X 2 ID 15.6 x dia. 1.8 NBR 90 Shore -45122-011
[mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in) FKM 90 Shore -42082-011
Sealing ring for venting screw 1 Required only for D639K
HNBR B97018-060-003
FKM B97018-060-002
Shipping plate 1 A40508
Fastening elements for shipping plate Do not use to mount the valve
Attachment screws 4 M6x55, slotted fillister head screw, tighten- -66119-060-055
ing torque: approx. 5 Nm / 3.7 lbf ft (hand-
tight)
Fastening nuts 4 M6, hexagon nut -66118-060
Tab. 30: Spare parts
12.3 Tools for valves in the D637K and D639K

type series
Item designation Comments Item number
Tools for the mating connectors of the valve con- Crimping tool for mating connector see operating
nectors instructions
eXLink, CEAG
Tab. 31: Spare parts for valves in the D67XK type series
13 Ordering Information
1 2 3 4 5 6
D637 / D639 K . . . . - . . . . .......
Model designation
Factory identification
Variant
1 Valve type
R Servo valve with integrated digital electronics, spool in bushing design
P Proportional valve with integrated digital electronics, spool in valve body design
2 Nominal flow rate valve type - P/R

QN [l/min] at Δ pN = 35 bar Δ pN = 5 bar per control land Series
24 60 24 D63xK - P/D63xK - R
40 100 40 D63xK - P/D63xK - R
60 160 60 D63xK - P
3 Pressure ranges in bar

Maximum operating pressure
K 350 bar
4 Bushing / spool design

0 4-way: Zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
A 4-way: 1.5 to 3 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
D 4-way: 10 % positive overlap, kinked characteristic curve
Z 2x2-way: P → A, B → T, only with Y connection
X Special spool, on request
5 Linear force motor Series

2 Standard D637K-R / D639K-R
6 high flow D637K-P / D639K-P
6 Spool position without supply voltage

M Mid position 1)
F P → A, B → T connected (10% open)
D P → A, B → T connected (10% open)
1) 3)
This does not correspond with bushing/spool design O, Valve parameterization with start-up software "Moog Valve Configurator"
A to the hydraulic mid position via M8 service connector
2) 4)
Only in connection with field bus connectors "G, H, J" Only in connection with field bus connector "G"
(switch to analog signals "M, X, E" possible) 5)
Only in connection with field bus connectors "H, J, O"
for use in areas subject to explosion
6)
Only in connection with field bus connector "J"
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
............
16 Valve functionality
A1 Q-control
B1 p-control
C1 pQ-control
15 Service connector X10

J3 Unclassified 4)
H3 With 5)
14 Field bus connector X3, X4

G CAN
H Profibus DP 3)
J EtherCAT 3)
O Unclassified 3)
13 Enable function
A When the enable signal is deactivated the spool takes up a controlled neutral position that can be set at the factory.
B Linear force motor without enable signal de-energized.
K6) When the enable signal is deactivated the spool takes up a settable controlled neutral position.
L6) Linear force motor without enable de-energized.
Others on request
12 Valve design
N Flow control with pressure limitation control upwards
D639K
M Pressure control in the main flow

D637K - -----------------------------------
11 Electrical supply
2 24 V DC (18 to 32 V DC)
10 Signals for flow Q and pressure p

Input signal Measurement output p
M ±10 V 4 to 20 mA
X ±10 mA 4 to 20 mA
E 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
9 Field bus digital 2)
Actual value output
Spool position 4 to 20 mA
9 Valve connector X1
J 7-pin
8 Gasket material
N HNBR
V FKM
A T-ECOPUR (-40° C)
B FKM44 (-40° C)
Others on request
7 Y port
0 Closed, with screw plug PTmax = 50 bar
3 Open, with filter element PT > 50 bar
1) 3)
This does not correspond with bushing/spool design O, Valve programming with start-up software "Moog Valve Configurator"
A to the hydraulic mid position via M8 service connector
2) 4)
Only in connection with field bus connectors "G, H, J" Only in connection with field bus connector "G"
(switch to analog signals "M, X, E" possible) 5)
Only in connection with field bus connectors "H, J, O"
for use in areas subject to explosion
6)
Only in connection with field bus connector "J"
14 Keyword index A…C
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
14 Keyword index
2/2-way seat valve Allocation of interfaces to connectors • 75
connector X9 in the block diagram of the valve/pump Ambient conditions
electronics • 73 permissible ambient conditions • 168
potentially explosive environment • 168
Ambient temperature, permissible ambient temperature • 168
Armature of the linear force motor, in the representative
A depiction • 19
Attachment screws for the shipping plate • 66, 156
Abbreviations fastening nuts, ordering information • 175
list of abbreviations • 190 in the installation drawing of the valve • 63
A/D (analog-digital converter) ordering information • 175
ACV (Axis Control Valve, valve with axis control position of bores F1…F4 in the mounting surface mounting
functionality) pattern • 64
CAN (Controller Area Network) tightening torque • 156
CiA (CAN in Automation e. V.) width across flats • 65, 155
D/A (digital-analog converter)
DDV (Direct Drive Valve)
DIN (Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.)
DSP (Draft Standard Proposal)
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
B
EN (European standard) Block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Block diagrams
EU (European Union) flow and pressure control (pQ-control) • 34
FKM (fluorocarbon rubber, material for gaskets, such as flow control (Q-control) • 32
O-rings) pressure control (p-control) • 33
GND (Ground) Bushing in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
ID (Identifier) Bushing-spool identification in the type designation • 26
ID (Inner Diameter, e.g. of O-rings)
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
IP (International Protection)
ISM (industrial, scientific and medical, e.g. for ISM devices)
ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
C
LED (Light Emitting Diode) Ctyp
LSS (Layer Setting Services) typical capacitance • 105
LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transformer) Cables
NBR (Nitrile Butadiene Rubber, material for gaskets, such cable length in CAN networks • 116
as O-rings) cable length in Profibus-DP networks • 119
NG (nominal size of the valve) cable routing inside machines • 105
PC (Personal Computer) calculation
PE (Protective Earth) maximum length • 106
PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) typical capacitance Ctyp • 105
PID (Proportional Integral Differential, e. g. in PID controller) typical resistance Rtyp • 105
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) voltage drop per unit length • 107
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) dimensioning • 105
SW (Width Across Flats for wrenches) permissible lengths • 105–109
TN (Technical Note) pin assignment of the cables for EtherCAT networks • 122
TÜV (Technischer Überwachungsverein) requirements • 101
USB (Universal Serial Bus) suitable cables for
UV (Ultraviolet) CAN networks • 116
VDE (Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik EtherCAT networks • 122
Informationstechnik e. V.) Profibus-DP networks • 120
VDI (Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e. V.) cAN bus
Accessories, ordering information • 173 general information • 84
Acronyms • 190 pin assignment • 85
Activation • 22, 39 Technical data • 84
ACV (Axis Control Valve) CAN (Controller Area Network)
Analog input connectors X5…X7 CAN bus interface • 50, 63
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18 literature, additional, CAN fundamentals • 192
Connector X2 for digital signal interface
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
adapter for service connector X10 • 139
Air humidity, permissible relative air humidity for storage • 168
14 Keyword index C…C
CAN networks Connector

cable cross section • 116 Connector X1 • 22
cable length • 116 in the connector overview • 74
interference immunity • 114 field bus connectors X3 and X4
module address • 117 in the connector overview • 74
number of bus nodes • 117 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
suitable cables • 116 list of interfaces • 75
transmission rate • 117 overview (arrangement of connectors on the valve
Wiring • 113–117 electronics housing) • 74
Procedure • 113 service connector X10
wiring diagram • 114 in the connector overview • 74
Cavitation • 51 X1 (valve connector) • 39, 171
CE labeling of the M3000® modules • A in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
Centering springs of the linear force motor X1 (connector)
in the representative depiction • 19 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
Characteristic curves pin assignment • 76
flow diagram • 51 X2 (connector X2 for digital signal interface)
flow signal characteristic curve • 37, 52 in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
design for measurement • 52 X2 (digital signal interface)
hydraulic zero position • 37 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
frequency response of the spool stroke • 54 X3 and X4 (field bus connectors)
Pressure characteristic curve • 52 dust protection caps • 135, 147
design for measurement • 52 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
step response of the spool stroke • 54 in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
characteristic curves • 51–56 X5…X7 (analog input connectors)
Checking/unpacking a delivery • 60 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
Cleaning in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
disposal of auxiliary materials and substances used • 9 X8 (external LVDT connector)
cleaning in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
cleaning connecting and mounting surfaces • 67 X9 (2/2-way seat valve connector)
Cleanliness level of the hydraulic fluid • 142, 169 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
Clock pulse output (signal of SSI transducer) • 83 X10 (service connector)
Command signal UCommand of input voltage • 111 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
Command signals, single-ended • 110 • 139
configuration of the valves • 49, 136 adapter • 139
configuration via the field bus interface • 137 dust protection cap • 135, 147
configuration via the service interface • 139 in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
factory setting of the valves • 140 X11 (pilot valve connector)
Configuration/start-up cable • 139 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
ordering information • 174 Connectors X3 and X4
Connecting plates • 173 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
Connecting surface pin assignment • 85, 87, 89
cleaning • 67 wiring CAN networks • 113–117
trouble shooting in event of a leak • 159 cable length and cable cross section • 116
Connection of the valve interference immunity • 114
hydraulic connection • 61, 66–67 Procedure • 113
wiring diagram • 114
wiring EtherCAT networks • 121–123
Procedure • 121
wiring Profibus-DP networks • 118–120
cable length and cable cross section • 119
Procedure • 118
Connectors X5…X7
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
pin assignment • 90
Connector X1 • 76
6+PE-pin connector • 76
versions • 76
Wiring
14 Keyword index D…F
Connector X2 Electrical shielding • 97–105

in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 electrical shielding • 5, 101
pin assignment • 83 connecting the shield • 102
wiring CAN networks • 113–117 connection with cable leadthrough • 102
cable length and cable cross section • 116 connection with plug connection • 103
interference immunity • 114 insulated shielding • 104
Procedure • 113 requirement of cable routing • 105
wiring diagram • 114 requirement of lines • 101
wiring SSI transducers • 112 Embrittlement of gaskets • 156
Connector X8 embrittlement of gaskets • 60
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 EMC
Connector X9 requirements during start-up • 127
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
Connector overview, arrangement of connectors on the valve EMC Directive • 196
electronics housing • 74 EMC protection requirements for immunity to interference
Connector X1 • 22 and emitted interference • 171–172
in the connector overview • 74 EMC standards • 171–172
Connector X10 emissions • 8
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 Emitted interference • 171–172
pin assignment • 93 Environmental protection
Connector X11 • 93 disposal • 9
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 emissions • 8
pin assignment • 93 equipotential bonding
Control loops deficient equipotential bonding • 101
trouble shooting in event of instabilities electrical shielding • 101
instability of the external control loop • 161 ground loops • 100
instability of the internal valve control loops • 161 insulated shielding in the event of deficient equipotential
Control oil supply • 169 bonding • 104
Conversion of actual value output signals Iout (4–20 mA) maximum potential difference (7 V) • 99
into 2–10 V • 111 of machines • 98
copyright performance • 99
for this manual • A protective conductor • 100
Current command signal ICommand • 110 cross section • 99
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
Safety instructions • 16
EtherCAT
D general information • 87
literature, additional, EtherCAT fundamentals • 193
Data matrix code maximum number of bus nodes • 88
example • 167 module address • 123
on the nameplate • 166 auto-increment addressing • 123
structure of the data matrix code • 167 fixed node addressing • 123
Date of manufacture on the nameplate • 166 pin assignment of the cables for EtherCAT networks • 122
DDV (Direct Drive Valve) • 17 pin assignment, connector X3 • 89
diesel effect • 142 suitable cables for EtherCAT networks • 122
dimensions Technical data • 88
valves with CAN bus interface • 63 transmission rate • 123
Directives, overview of quoted directives • 196 wiring diagram, EtherCAT networks • 122
disposal • 9 wiring EtherCAT networks • 121–123
Documents, supplementing Procedure • 121
catalog • 5 EU (European Union)
ordering information • 174 Evenness, required for mounting surface • 64
technical notes (TNs) • 5 Exclusion of liability • 11
Drift of the internal pressure transducer, monitoring the drift • Exclusion of warranty • 11
34, 136, 158 External LVDT connector X8
dust protection caps in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
for field bus connectors X3 and X4 • 135, 147
for service connector X10 • 135, 147
Duty cycle • 171
Dynamic data • 170
F
fl
limit frequency • 108
E
Electrical data • 171
14 Keyword index G…H
F1…F4 (position of the holes for mounting screws and Flushing plate
attachment screws for the shipping plate in the hole pattern ordering information • 173
of the mounting surface) • 64 using when flushing the hydraulic system • 141
factory setting of the valves • 140 flushing the hydraulic system • 141
Fail-safe events • 27 Formulae
control commands • 29 Flow Q • 51
failure of the supply voltage • 27 Minimum flushing time t of a hydraulic system • 142
restarting the valve frequency response of the spool stroke • 54
after occurrence of a fail-safe event • 30 function
settable fault reaction • 28 linear force motor • 19
signals at the enable input • 28 Valve • 17
Fail-safe functions • 24 Fuse protection, external fuse protection for each valve • 171
electrical fail-safe function • 26
mechanical fail-safe functions • 25
valves with mechanical fail-safe function M • 25
Valves with mechanical fail-safe function F or D • 25
Fail-safe identification, in the type designation • 25
G
Fail-safe states GND
electrical fail-safe state • 24, 26–28 ground contact of connector X1 • 76
mechanical fail-safe state • 24–25, 27–28 Ground connection of connector X1 • 76
Field bus Ground contact (GND) of connector X1 • 76
connection of the valve/pump Ground (electrical)
Safety instructions • 69 Ground contact (GND) of connector X1 • 76
field bus connectors X3 and X4 single-ended command signals • 110
in the connector overview • 74 single-ended connection of the analog command inputs •
Field bus connectors X3 and X4 111
cAN bus connectors • 85 Gumming of hydraulic fluid during long-term storage • 60
EtherCAT connectors • 89
general information • 84
Profibus-DP connectors • 87 H
versions of the connectors • 84
Field bus interface handling in accordance with safety requirements • 14, 68
configuration of the valves via the field bus interface • 137 Handling, in accordance with safety requirements • 14, 68
Fill filter for hydraulic system HNBR (hydrogenated nitrile butadiene acrylic rubber) • 169
required filter fineness x • 141 Hydraulic data • 169
Filling the hydraulic system • 141 Hydraulic fluid
Filter, fill filter for hydraulic system cleanliness level • 169
required filter fineness x • 141 disposal • 9
Filter fineness x permissible fluids • 169
Fill filter for hydraulic system • 141 permissible temperature range • 169
FKM (fluorocarbon rubber) • 169, 175 permissible viscosity  • 169
Flow Q hydraulic fluid
flow signal characteristic curve • 37, 52 cleanliness level • 142
formula for calculation • 51 diesel effect • 142
leakage flow QL • 169 gumming during long-term storage • 60
maximum flow Qmax • 51, 169 required filter fineness x for fill filter for hydraulic system •
rated flow QN • 169 141
Flow and pressure control (pQ-control) • 17 Hydraulic symbols • 35–36
flow and pressure control (pQ-control) • 34 on the nameplate • 166
block diagram • 34 hydraulic symbols
Flow control (Q-control) • 17 2x2-way operation • 36
trouble shooting in event of instability of the internal valve 2-way operation • 36
control loop • 161 3-way operation • 35
flow control (Q-control) • 32 4-way operation • 35
block diagram • 32 Hydraulic system
flow diagram • 51 connection of the valve to the hydraulic system • 61, 66
Flow rate of a pump Q • 142 filling and flushing • 141
flow signal characteristic curve minimum flushing time • 142
Characteristic curve • 52 required filter fineness x for fill filter • 141
design for measurement • 52 preparing • 141
electrical zero position • 37 Start-up • 142
hydraulic zero position • 37 start-up • 141–142
Flow speed • 51 venting • 142
Hysteresis • 170
14 Keyword index I…L
I Inputs, analog inputs

at connectors X5…X7
ICommand ±10 V • 91
current command signal • 110 0–10 mA • 91
Iout 0–10 V • 91
output current • 111 4–20 mA • 92
ISupply benefits of the different signal types • 96
supply current • 110 Connections • 81
ID (Identifier) in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
ID (Inner Diameter, e.g. of O-rings) maximum current for transducer supply • 124
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) on connector X1 • 76
Immunity to interference • 171–172 ±10 mA • 79
incremental transducer ±10 V • 78
power supply • 82 0–10 mA • 79
reversal point of signals • 112 0–10 V • 78
speed variation of signals • 112 4–20 mA • 80
Index of figures • vii overview of connections • 77
Index of Tables • vii pin assignment X5…X7 • 90
Initial start-up, safety instructions • 68 power supply to the transducer • 90
Input resistances at connectors X5…X7 • 92 signal types
Input resistances Rin at connectors X5…X7 • 91
analog command inputs • 171 evaluating the signal types • 96
Input voltage Uin • 111 on connector X1 • 78
Inputs, analog command inputs single-ended connection • 111
±10 mA differential • 43 Wiring • 124–126
±10 V differential • 42 2-wire transducer • 125
0–10 mA differential • 46 3-wire transducer • 125
0–10 V differential • 45 4-wire transducer • 125
4–20 mA differential • 44, 47 Connectors X5…X7 • 124–126
current inputs Inputs, digital inputs
±10 mA differential • 43 Enable input • 171
0–10 mA differential • 46 enable input • 28, 48, 76
4–20 mA differential • 44, 47 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
flow control command inputs signals at the enable input as fail-safe events • 28
±10 mA differential • 43 on connector X1
±10 V differential • 42 enable input • 81
4–20 mA differential • 44 overview of connections • 81
input resistances Rin • 171 Instability of the control loops, trouble shooting
pressure control command inputs instability of the external control loop • 161
0–10 mA differential • 46 instability of the internal valve control loops • 161
0–10 V differential • 45 installation position • 168
4–20 mA differential • 47 Installation screws
signal type on the nameplate • 166 ordering information • 173
signal types installation screws
overview • 40 position of bores F1…F4 in the mounting surface mounting
signal type identification in the type designation • 41 pattern • 64
voltage inputs required quality class • 65
±10 V differential • 42 specification • 65
0–10 V differential • 45 tightening torque • 65
width across flats • 65, 155
intended operation • 5
Item numbers
accessories • 173
spare parts • 175
L
lmax
maximum length of the supply cable • 106
Leak, trouble shooting
connecting surface of the valve • 159
Venting screw • 159
leakage flow QL • 169
14 Keyword index M…O
LED Moog Valve Configuration Software • 50, 137–139

Status LEDs operation • 129
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 ordering information • 174
Light emitting diodes (LEDs) possible faults • 129
status LEDs Safety instructions • ??–72, ??–129, ??–129
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18 safety instructions • 72, 128
linear force motor • 19 Mounting
Armature • 19 installation position • 168
Bearing • 19 mounting option • 168
Centering springs • 19 orientation of the venting screw • 168
Coil • 19 mounting • 61, 66
Cross section • 19 orientation of the venting screw • 67
cutaway drawing • 19 Procedure • 67
Permanent magnets • 19 tools and materials required • 65
representative depiction • 19 mounting option • 168
screw plug • 19 mounting pattern of mounting surface • 64, 169
Linearity of pressure control • 169 Mounting surface • 64
Literature, additional cleaning • 67
CAN fundamentals • 192 mounting pattern • 64, 169
directives, quoted • 196 permissible average roughness Ra • 64
EtherCAT fundamentals • 193 required evenness • 64
Fundamentals of hydraulics • 192
Moog publications • 193
Profibus fundamentals • 192
standards, quoted • 193–196
supplementing documents • 5
N
Load impedance RL Nameplate • 165–166
analog actual value outputs • 111, 171 NBR (nitrile butadiene acrylic rubber) • 175
LSS NG (nominal size) • 169
LSS address Nominal size (NG) • 169
on the nameplate • 166
LSS (Layer Setting Services)
Example of a LSS address • 167
structure of the LSS address • 167 O
LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transducer)
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18 occupational safety and health
LVDT (position transducer) safe distances for cardiac pacemakers and similar devices
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 due to magnetic fields • 15
safety equipment • 15
sound insulation measures • 15
operating pressure pP
maximum operating pressure • 169–170
M Maximum operating pressure on the nameplate • 166
Maintenance Operation of the valves • 144–148
O-ring checking and replacement ambient conditions, permissible • 168
ports • 157 intended operation • 5
maintenance • 151–154 necessary preparations • 147
Manufacturer's declaration • 12 operational modes • 17, 31
Marks, registered • 13 O-rings
microprocessor system checking and replacing the O-rings
for storing the valve software parameters • 140 ports • 157
in the valve electronics • 19 cleaning • 67
Minimum flushing time for flushing the hydraulic system • 142 embrittlement • 60, 156
Mode of operation ordering information • 175
linear force motor • 19 permissible materials • 169
Valve • 17 Protection against ozone and UV effects with shipping
Model number plate • 58–59, 66, 134, 156
example • 167 service sealing set, ordering information • 173
on the nameplate • 166 specification • 175
structure of the model number • 167 Output current Iout • 111
Output voltage Uout • 111
14 Keyword index P…P
Outputs, analog actual value outputs Potentially explosive environment • 168

overview • 171 Power consumption Pmin and Pmax • 171
4–20 mA (pressure actual value output) • 48 Power supply
4–20 mA (spool position actual value output) • 48 Connection via connector X1 • 76
conversion of Iout (4–20 mA) into 2–10 V • 111 failure of the supply voltage • 27
load impedance RL • 171 restarting the valve afterwards • 30
pressure actual value output 4–20 mA • 48 Power supply • 171
spool position actual value output 4–20 mA • 48 on the nameplate • 166
Outputs, analog outputs Power supply cord, order information • 174
Connections • 81 Requirements of supply voltage • 77
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 SELV/PELV power pack
on connector X1 • 76 Ordering information • 174
2–10 V • 80 SELV/PELV power supply • 171
4–20 mA • 80 Supply voltage
overview of connections • 77 failure of the supply voltage • 27
Outputs, digital outputs power supply
on connector X1 connection via connector X1 • 76
Valve standby • 81 Power supply cord, order information • 174
overview of connections • 81 Pressure characteristic curve
Overlap • 35, 37, 169 Characteristic curve • 52
Design for measurement • 52
Pressure control (p-control) • 17, 33
Block diagram • 33
P Linearity of pressure control • 169
Trouble shooting in event of instability of the internal valve
Packaging control loop • 161
disposal • 9 Pressure controller
storing original packaging • 60 factory setting • 140
PC (Personal Computer) in the p-control block diagram • 33
PE in the pQ-control block diagram • 34
protective conductor contact of connector X1 • 76 notes on control response • 38
Permanent magnets of the linear force motor trouble shooting in event of instability of the internal valve
in the representative depiction • 19 control loop • 161
PID (Proportional Integral Differential) Pressure difference p • 51
PID controller • 33 pressure limitation • 16, 133
pilot pressure pX Pressure range identification, in the type designation • 170
on the nameplate • 166 Pressure transducer, internal
Pilot valve connector X11 in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 monitoring the drift • 34, 136, 158
pin assignment • 93 Pressure p
pin assignment operating pressure pP
X1 (connector) Maximum operating pressure on the nameplate • 166
6+PE-pin • 76 pilot pressure pX
X2 (digital signal interface) on the nameplate • 166
SSI transducer • 83 Procedure for electrically connecting valves/pumps • 96
X3 and X4 (field bus interface) Profibus
cAN bus • 85 literature, additional, Profibus fundamentals • 192
EtherCAT • 89 Profibus-DP
Profibus-DP • 87 maximum number of bus nodes • 86
X5…X7 (analog input connectors) • 90 pin assignment • 87
X10 (service connector) • 93 Technical data • 86
X11 (pilot valve connector) • 93 Profibus-DP interface
Ports general information • 85
diameter of ports • 64, 169 Profibus-DP networks
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18 cable cross section • 119
Leakage port Y • 36 cable length • 119
Y identification in the type designation • 37 module address • 120
on the nameplate • 166 suitable cables • 120
position of the ports in the mounting surface mounting transmission rate • 120
pattern • 64 Wiring • 118–120
ports Procedure • 118
O-ring checking and replacement • 157 wiring diagram • 119
trouble shooting in event of leaks • 159 Prohibition to duplicate - user manual • A
Position transducer (LVDT) Prohibition to reproduce - user manual • A
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 Protection type by enclosure (IP) • 171
14 Keyword index Q…S
protective conductor
deficient equipotential bonding • 101
ground loops • 100
maximum potential difference (7 V) • 99
procedure for connecting • 100
required cross section • 99
Protective conductor contact PE of connector X1 • 76
Protective grounding • 5, 97–105, 172
of connector X1 • 76
of machines • 98
performance • 99
Q
qtyp
typical cross section • 105
Qualification, requirements of the user • 7
Quality class, required for installation screws • 65
R
Cu
resistivity of copper • 105
RL
load impedance RL of the analog actual value outputs • 111
Rtyp
typical resistance • 105
Rated flow QN • 169
Rated pressure difference pN • 51
reference temperature of the valve electronics • 168–169
Release date of the user manual • 1
Removing • 151–156
repair • 151–154, 162
Representative depictions
linear force motor • 19
servo valve • 18
Responsibilities • 10
Responsibility of the manufacturer and the operator of the
machine • 10
restarting the valve • 30
Roughness Ra, average, permissible for mounting surface • 64
S
Safe distances for cardiac pacemakers and similar devices due
to magnetic fields • 15
14 Keyword index S…S
Safety instructions start-up • 130–135

general safety instructions • 16 Storage • 58
ambient conditions, permissible • 168 storage • 58
analog command inputs • 42–47 structural modifications • 7
attachment elements for the shipping plate • 66, 156 Supply voltage
cleaning the valve connecting surface, mounting surface failure of the supply voltage • 27
and O-rings • 67 symbols, used • 3
configuration of the valves • 136, 147 Technical Data • 16, 147
connection to the hydraulic system • 61, 66 Technical data • 164
corrective maintenance • 151–154, 162 transportation • 58
delivery of repaired valves and replacement valves with Trouble shooting • 151–154, 159–160
factory settings • 162 trouble shootingSafety instructions
diesel effect • 142 removing •
disposal • 9 14–15, 21, 42–47, 69–70, 72–73, 97, 113, 117–118
electrical and hydraulic zero positions • 37 , 120–121, 123, 128–129, 153, 173
electrical properties • 69 typographical conventions • 3
equipotential bonding • 71 use, intended • 5
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) • 16 valve software • 49, 136, 147
failure of the supply voltage • 27 valve status 'NOT READY' • 20, 27–28
flushing the hydraulic system • 141 venting • 143
handling in accordance with safety requirements • 14, 68 Venting screw • 67
hydraulic connection • 61, 66 zero positions, electrical and hydraulic • 37
Hydraulic fluid • 15, 152 Safety shoes • 15
hydraulic fluid • 61, 131 Safety-critical applications • 24
diesel effect • 142 Scope of delivery • 60
initial start-up • 68 Screw plug on the linear force motor
connection to field bus • 69 in the representative depiction • 19
installation • Sealing ring for venting screw
14–15, 21, 42–47, 69–70, 72–73, 97, 113, 117–118, 12 ordering information • 175
0–121, 123, 128–129, 153, 173 trouble shooting in event of a leak at the venting screw • 159
intended operation • 5 selection and qualification of personnel • 7
isolation from the mains system • 69 qualified users • 7
leak at the linear force motor screw plug • 159 SELV/PELV power pack
linear force motor screw plug • 159 ordering information • 174
maintenance • SELV/PELV power supply • 171
14–15, 21, 42–47, 69–70, 72–73, 97, 113, 117–118, 12 SensorSup
0–121, 123, 128–129, 151, 153–154, 173 supply voltage to the SSI transducer • 83
Moog Valve Configuration Software • 72, 128–129 Serial number on the nameplate • 166
mounting • 61, 66 service • 151–163
mounting pattern of mounting surface • 64 Service connector X10
occupational safety and health general information • 93
safe distances for cardiac pacemakers and similar in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
devices due to magnetic fields • 15 pin assignment • 93
safety equipment • 15 service connector X10
sound insulation measures • 15 in the connector overview • 74
open connectors • 135, 147 Service interface
operation • 144–147 configuration of the valves via the service interface • 139
original accessories and original spare parts • 154 Service sealing set, ordering information • 173
potentially explosive environment • 168 Shipping plate • 58
power pack • 69 attachment screws
pressure control (p-control) • 32 ordering information • 175
pressure limitation • 16, 133 fastening nuts, ordering information • 175
protective conductor system • 71 ordering information • 175
Removing • 151–154, 156 shipping plate • 134
repair • Attachment screws • 66, 156
14–15, 21, 42–47, 69–70, 72–73, 97, 113, 117–118, 12 in the installation drawing of the valve • 63
0–121, 123, 128–129, 151, 153–154, 162, 173 position of bores F1…F4 in the mounting surface
restarting the valve after the valve has adopted the fail-safe mounting pattern • 64
state • 30 tightening torque • 156
safety-critical applications • 24 width across flats • 65, 155
selection and qualification of personnel • 7 mounting • 156
service • 151–154 removal • 67
shipping plate • 156 Shock resistance • 168
shutting down the valve • 149 shutting down the valve • 149
sound insulation measures • 8
14 Keyword index S…S
Signal cables Standards

cable length • 109 overview of quoted standards • 193–196
calculation CiA DSP • 167, 191, 193
limit frequency • 108 DIN • 194
typical capacitance Ctyp • 105 DIN EN • 194
typical resistance Rtyp • 105 DIN EN ISO • 195
dimensioning • 105 IEC • 193
influence of capacitance per unit length • 108 IEEE • 193
influence of resistance • 108 ISO • 196
limit frequency • 108 ISO/DIS • 194
permissible lengths • 105–109 ISO/IEC • 194
recommendations • 108 overview of quoted standards • ??–193
Signal interface, digital signal interface X2 Start-up
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73 Hydraulic system • 142
SSI transducer • 83 hydraulic system • 141–142
Signal type identification in the type designation • 41 restarting the valve • 30
Signal types for analog command inputs valve • 130–140
on the nameplate • 166 start-up
Signal zero of connector X1 • 76 EMC requirements • 127
Signal, differential signal Static data • 170
evaluation • 96 step response of the spool stroke • 54
Software Step response time for 0 to 100 % spool stroke • 170
Moog Valve Configuration Software • 50, 137–139 Storage • 58, 60
ordering information • 174 ambient conditions, permissible • 168
valve software • 49 embrittlement of gaskets • 60
configuration of the valves • 49, 136 gumming of hydraulic fluid • 60
via the field bus interface • 137 original packaging • 60
via the service interface • 139 storage location for user manual • 2
factory setting • 140 storage • 58, 60
microprocessor system • 19 embrittlement of gaskets • 60
for storing parameters • 140 gumming of hydraulic fluid • 60
sound insulation measures • 8, 15 original packaging • 60
Spare parts, ordering information • 175 Structural modifications • 7
Spool styles/spelling, used • 3
bushing-spool identification in the type designation • 26 Subject to change without notice - user manual • A, 1
defined spring-determined position of the spool in the Supply cables
mechanical fail-safe state • 25 calculation
frequency response of the spool stroke • 54 maximum length • 106
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18 typical capacitance Ctyp • 105
Overlap • 37, 169 typical resistance Rtyp • 105
overlap • 35 voltage drop per unit length • 107
step response of the spool stroke • 54 dimensioning • 105
step response time for 0 to 100 % spool stroke • 170 permissible lengths • 105–109
Zero lap • 37 Supply current Isupply • 110
zero lap • 35, 169 supply voltage
zero position (electrical and hydraulic) • 37 in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 73
Spool position controller Supply zero of connector X1 • 76
in the p-control block diagram • 33
in the pQ-control block diagram • 34
in the Q-control block diagram • 32
SSI transducer
cable break monitoring • 82
connection to valve/pump • 112
power supply • 83
recommended cable types • 82
signals between valve/pump • 112
supported transducer types • 82
Wiring • 112
14 Keyword index T…V
Symbols transportation • 58
list of symbols • 190 transportation damage • 59
x • 190 Trouble shooting • 151–154, 158–161
p (pressure difference) overview of possible faults • 158
pN (rated pressure difference) instabilities of the control loop
icomm (current command signal) external control loop • 161
iin (input current) internal valve control loops • 161
iout (output current) leak at the valve connecting surface • 159
isupply (supply current) leak at the venting screw • 159
l (length) no hydraulic response by the valve • 160
 (viscosity) TÜV (Technischer Überwachungsverein)
Pmax (power consumption at maximum flow) Type designation • 170
Pmin (power consumption for motor in neutral position) bushing-spool identification • 26
p (pressure) fail-safe identification • 25
pN (rated pressure) on the nameplate • 166
pP (operating pressure) Pressure range identification • 170
Q (flow) signal type identification • 41
Q (flow rate of a pump) Y identification • 37
QL (leakage flow) typographical conventions • 3
Qmax (maximum flow)
QN (rated flow)
Ra (average roughness)
Rin (input resistance)
rL (load impedance)
U
T (Temperature) UCable
t (time) voltage drop on the cable • 111
Ucable (voltage drop on the cable) UCommand
ucomm (input voltage command signal) command signal of input voltage • 111
uin (input voltage) Udr_max
uout (output voltage) maximum voltage drop on the cable • 106
V (volume) Umin
symbols, used • 3 minimum supply voltage • 106
Uout
output voltage • 111
Uin
T input voltage • 111
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
t (symbol for time) USB start-up module • 139
Table of contents • i ordering information • 174
Technical data use, intended • 5
characteristic curves • 51–56 User manual
diagrams • 51–56 ordering information • 174
dimensions • 62 prohibition to duplicate • A
electrical data • 171 prohibition to reproduce • A
general technical data • 168 release date • 1
hydraulic data • 169 storage location • 2
Installation drawings • 62 styles/spelling, used • 3
mounting pattern of mounting surface • 64, 169 subject to change without notice • A, 1
static and dynamic data • 170 symbols, used • 3
Temperature T typographical conventions • 3
permissible ambient temperature • 168 version number • 1
permissible temperature range for hydraulic fluid • 169 User manual M3000® and MSC-R
reference temperature of the valve electronics • 168–169 copyright • A
Throttle valve • 17 duplication prohibition • A
Tightening torques reproduction prohibition • A
attachment screws for the shipping plate • 156 Users, qualified • 7
installation screws • 65 UV (ultraviolet), protection of the seals against ozone and UV
Venting screw • 143 effects • 58–59, 66, 134, 156
TN (Technical Note) • 5
Tools
required for wiring valves/pumps • 95
Trademarks, registered • 13
Transportation
V
ambient conditions, permissible • 168 V (symbol for volume)
14 Keyword index W…Z
Valve configurations • 35–36, 169 Wiring

2-way operation • 36 tools and materials required • 95
3-way operation • 35 X1
4-way operation • 35 6+PE-pin connector • 110
hydraulic symbols 11+PE-pin connector • 110
2-way operation • 36 X2
3-way operation • 35 CAN network • 113
4-way operation • 35 SSI transducer • 112
Valve construction type • 169 X3 and X4
Valve electronics CAN network • 113
reference temperature • 168–169 EtherCAT network • 121
valve electronics • 19 Profibus-DP network • 118
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18 X5…X7 • 124
microprocessor system • 19 2-wire transducer • 125
for storing the valve software parameters • 140 3-wire transducer • 125
valve software • 49 4-wire transducer • 125
configuration of the valves • 49, 136 Work gloves • 15
via the field bus interface • 137 Wrench sizes (WW)
via the service interface • 139 Venting screw • 143
factory setting • 140 wrench sizes (WW)
microprocessor system • 19 attachment screws for the shipping plate • 65, 155
for storing the valve software parameters • 140 installation screws • 65, 155
Valve status
overview of the valve status • 20
'ACTIVE' • 20, 30
'DISABLED' • 20, 27, 29–30, 150, 168–169
'FAULT DISABLED' • 20, 27–28, 30
Y
'FAULT HOLD' • 20, 24, 26–28, 30 Y identification in the type designation • 37
'HOLD' • 20, 24, 26–27, 29–30
'INIT' • 20, 27, 29–30, 150
'NOT READY' • 20, 27–28
Valve/pump electronics, block diagram • 73 Z
VDE (Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik
Informationstechnik e. V.) Zero lap • 35, 37
VDI (Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e. V.) zero lap • 169
venting Zero position of the spool
Hydraulic system • 142 electrical zero position • 37
valve • 143 hydraulic zero position • 37
Venting screw Zero shift • 170
in the installation drawing of the valve • 63
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
orientation of the venting screw when mounting the valve •
67, 168
procedure for venting the valve • 143
sealing ring, ordering information • 175
tightening torque • 143
trouble shooting in event of a leak • 159
width across flats • 143
Version number of the user manual • 1
Vibration resistance • 168
Viscosity  of the hydraulic fluid • 169
Voltage drop UCable on the cable • 111
W
Valve configurations
2x2-way operation • 36
hydraulic symbols
2x2-way operation • 36
15 Appendix Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters
15 Appendix
15.1 Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters
Fig. Explanation Tab. 32: Abbreviations,
symbols, and
x Symbol for filter fineness
identification letters
p symbol for pressure difference
pN symbol for rated pressure difference
 symbol for viscosity
A Valve port (consumer port)
A Wiring the 6+PE-pin valve connector X1
A/D Analog-Digital converter
ACV Axis Control Valve (valve with axis control function)
B Valve port (consumer port)
B Wiring the 6+PE-pin valve connector X1
C Wiring the 6+PE-pin valve connector X1
CAN Controller Area Network
CANopen Standardized communication profile
CiA CAN in Automation e. V. (International Manufacturers' and Users' Organization
for CAN Users; http://www.can-cia.org)
D Differential (e. g.: in PID controller)
D Fail-safe function D of valve
D Wiring the 6+PE-pin valve connector X1
D/A Digital-Analog converter
DDV Direct Drive Valve
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (German Institute for Standardization)
(http://www.din.de)
DSP Draft Standard Proposal
E Wiring the 6+PE-pin valve connector X1
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN Europa-Norm (European standard)
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
EU European Union
F Fail-safe function F of valve
F Wiring the 6+PE-pin valve connector X1
F1…F4 Bore for installation screws or attachment screws for the shipping plate in the
mounting pattern of the valve mounting surface
FKM fluorocarbon rubber (material for gaskets, such as O-rings)
G Bore for positioning pin in the mounting pattern of the valve mounting surface
GND Ground
I Integral (e.g. in PID controller)
Iin Symbol for input current
Iout Symbol for output current
ICommand Symbol for current command signal
ISupply Symbol for supply current
ID Identifier
ID Inner Diameter (e.g. on O-rings)
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (http://www.iec.ch)
Tab. 32: Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters (Part 1 of 3)
15 Appendix Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters

IP International Protection
symbols, and
(IP code; degree of protection type by enclosure as per EN 60529) identification letters
ISM Industrial, scientific and medical
(industrial, scientific, and medical, e. g. for ISM devices)
ISO International Organization for Standardization (http://www.iso.org)
LED Light Emitting Diode
LSS Layer Setting Services as per CiA DSP 305 (LSS offers the option of setting the
node parameters, such as module address or transmission rate, of a CAN node
via the CAN bus)
LVDT Linear Variable Differential Transformer
(position transducer; senses the position of the spool in the valve)
M Fail-safe function M of valve
NBR Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (material for gaskets, such as O-rings)
NG Nominal size of the valve, e.g. 6
P Proportional (e.g. in PID controller)
P Valve port (pressure port)
Pmax Symbol for power consumption at maximum flow
Pmin Symbol for power consumption with motor in neutral position
P Symbol for pressure (Pressure)
pN Symbol for rated pressure
pP Symbol for operating pressure
PC Personal Computer
PE Protective Earth
PE Wiring the 6 or 11+PE-pin valve connector X1
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PID Proportional Integral Differential (e. g. in PID controller)
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
Q Symbol for flow
Q Symbol for flow rate of a pump
QL Symbol for leakage flow
Qmax Symbol for maximum flow
QN Symbol for rated flow
Ra Symbol for average roughness
RIn Symbol for input resistance
RL Symbol for load impedance
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage (low voltage)
WAF Width Across Flats for wrenches
T Symbol for temperature
T Valve port (tank port)
T Symbol for time
TN Technical Note
TÜV Technischer Überwachungsverein (German Technical Inspection Agency)
Uin Symbol for input voltage
Uout Symbol for output voltage
Ucomm Symbol for input voltage command signal
Ucable Symbol for voltage drop on the cable
USB Universal Serial Bus
UV Ultraviolet
V Symbol for volume (such as tank capacity)
15 Appendix Additional literature

VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik Informationstechnik e. V. (German Asso-
symbols, and
ciation of Electrical Engineering, Electronics and Information Technology) identification letters
(http://www.vde.de)
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e. V. (Association of German Engineers)
(http://www.vdi.de)
X Valve port
X1…X10 Designations for the valve connectors
Y Valve port (leakage port)
15.2 Additional literature

15.2.1 Fundamentals of hydraulics
Findeisen, Dietmar und Findeisen, Franz: Additional literature:
Ölhydraulik; Springer-Verlag fundamentals of
hydraulics
Murrenhoff, Univ.-Prof. Dr.-Ing. Hubertus:
Grundlagen der Fluidtechnik - Teil 1: Hydraulik (Vorlesungsumdruck des
IFAS der RWTH Aachen)
http://www.rwth-aachen.de/ifas
Servohydraulik (Vorlesungsumdruck des IFAS der RWTH Aachen)
Steuerungs- und Schaltungstechnik II (Vorlesungsumdruck des IFAS der
RWTH Aachen)
Schäfer, Dr. Klaus D.:
Stetighydraulik - Grundlagen, Ventiltechnik, Regelkreise; Die Bibliothek
der Technik, Band 215; Verlag Moderne Industrie
15.2.2 CAN fundamentals

CAN in Automation e. V.: Additional literature: CAN
http://www.can-cia.org fundamentals
Etschberger, Konrad (editor):
CAN - Controller-Area-Network - Grundlagen, Protokolle, Bausteine, An-
wendungen; Carl Hanser Verlag
Lawrenz, Wolfhard (editor):
CAN - Controller Area Network - Grundlagen und Praxis; Hüthig Verlag
15.2.3 Profibus fundamentals

PROFIBUS Users' Organization: Additional literature:
http://www.profibus.com Profibus fundamentals
Popp, Manfred:
PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1 - Grundlagen, Tipps und Tricks für Anwender;
Hüthig Verlag
15 Appendix Quoted standards
15.2.4 EtherCAT fundamentals

EtherCAT Technology Group: Additional literature:
http://www.ethercat.org EtherCAT fundamentals
15.2.5 Moog publications

Press releases: Additional literature:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/news Publications by our
company
Newsletters:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/newsletter
Articles in technical journals:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/articles
Presentations and scientific publications:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/papers
User manuals, TNs, catalogs, and similar:
15.3 Quoted standards

15.3.1 CiA DSP
CiA DSP 305 Quoted standards:
CiA Draft Standard Proposal: CANopen Layer Setting Services and Protocol CiA DSP
(LSS)
15.3.2 TIA/EIA
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Quoted standards: EIA
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General
Requirements
EIA 422
Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits
TIA/EIA-485-A
Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced
Digital Multipoint Systems
15.3.3 IEC
IEC 62407 Quoted standards: IEC
Real-time Ethernet control automation technology (EtherCATTM)
15.3.4 IEEE
IEEE 802.3 Quoted standards
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Access Method and Physical Layer
15.3.5 ISO, ISO/IEC

ISO 11898 Quoted standards: ISO,
Road vehicles – CAN protocol ISO/IEC
ISO/IEC 8802-3
Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange
between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks, specific require-
ments - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
15.3.6 DIN
DIN 51524-1 Quoted standards: DIN
Pressure fluids; Hydraulic oils Part 1: HL hydraulic oils; Minimum require-
ments
DIN 51524-2
Pressure fluids; Hydraulic oils Part 2: HLP hydraulic oils; Minimum
requirements
DIN 51524-3
Pressure fluids; Hydraulic oils Part 3: HVLP hydraulic oils; Minimum requirements
DIN 61000
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
15.3.7 EN
EN 563 Quoted standards: EN
Safety of machinery – Temperatures of touchable surfaces – Ergonomics
data to establish temperature limit values for hot surfaces
EN 982
Safety of machinery – Safety requirements for fluid power systems and
their components – Hydraulics
EN 55011
Industrial, Scientific And Medical Equipment (ISM devices) –Radio-fre-
quency Disturbance Characteristics –Limits And Methods Of Measure-
ment
EN 60068-2-6
Environmental tests – Part 2: Tests; test Fc: vibration, sinus-shaped
(IEC 60068-2-6:1995 + Corrigendum 1995)
EN 60068-2-27
Environmental tests – Part 2: Tests; test Ea and guidelines: shocks
(IEC 60068-2-27:1987)
EN 60079-0
Explosive atmospheres. Equipment. General requirements - Part 0: Oper-
ating materials - general requirements
EN 60079-1
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 1: Flameproof
enclosures 'd'
EN 60079-7
Explosive atmospheres - Part 7: Equipment protection by increased
safety "e"
EN 60204
Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60529
Protection types provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 61000-6-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-2: Generic standards –
Immunity to interference for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-3
Emitted interference for residential, commercial and light-industrial envi-
ronments
EN 61000-6-4
Emitted interference for industrial environments
EN 61076-2-101
Connectors for electronic equipment - Part 2-101: circular connectors -
type specification for circular connector M8 with screw or snap locking and
M12 with screw locking for low-voltage applications
EN 61558-1
Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products –
Part 1: General requirements and tests
EN 61158-2
Digital data communication in instrumentation and control – Field bus for
industrial control systems
EN 61558-2-6
Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products
for supply voltages up to 1100 V – Part 2-6: Special requirements and
tests for safety transformers and power supplies that contain safety trans-
formers
EN 175201-804
Type specification –Circular connectors – Round contacts, size diame-
ter 1.6 mm –threaded coupling
15.3.8 EN ISO
EN ISO 1302 Quoted standards:
Geometrical Product Specifications (GPS) Indication of surface texture in EN ISO
technical product documentation
EN ISO 4762
Hexagon socket head cap screws
EN ISO 12100
Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for design
EN ISO 13849-1
Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems – Part 1:
General design principles
EN ISO 13849
Safety of machinery – Safety requirements for fluid power systems and
their components – Hydraulics
15 Appendix Quoted directives
15.3.9 ISO
ISO 4401 Quoted standards: ISO
Hydraulic fluid power – 4-port directional control valves – Mounting surfaces
ISO 4406
Hydraulic fluid power – Fluids – Method for coding level of contamination
by solid particles
ISO11158
Lubricants, industrial oils and related products (class L) -- Family H
(hydraulic systems) -- Specifications for categories HH, HL, HM, HV and
HG
15.4 Quoted directives

2006/42/EC Quoted directives
Directive 2006/42/EG of the European Parliament and Council for align-
ment of the legal and administrative provisions of the Member States for
machinery
2004/108/EC
Directive 2004/108/EC concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
94/9/EG
ATEX product guideline
1999/92/EG
ATEX operating guideline
VDI offers numerous directives for downloading:

http://www.vdi-nachrichten.com/ce-richtlinien/basics/richtlin-
ien.asp .
15.5 Explosion-proof connectors
Instructions from the company Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
eXLink 4-polig Stecker, Kupplung/
4-pole plug, coupler/
C US
4 pôles fiche, prolongateur
Technische Angaben Technical Data Caractéristiques techniques

Gerätekennzeichnung nach 94/9/EG und Norm: Apparatus marking acc. to 94/9/EC & directive Marquage de l’appareil selon 94/9/CE & directive
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IICT6 II 2 G Ex ia/ib IICT6 II 2 G Ex ia/ib IICT6
II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T80°C II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T80°C II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T80°C
nach CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6 acc. CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6 en fonction de CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
EG-Baumusterprüfbescheinigung: EC type examination certificate: Attestation d’examen CE de type:
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Zulässige Umgebungs- Permissible ambient Température ambiante
temperatur: -25°C/-55°C bis +40°C1) temperature: -25°C/-55°C to +40 °C1) admissible: -25°C/-55°C à +40°C1)
Bemessungsspannung: bis 250 V, 50/60 Hz Rated voltage: up to 250 V, 50/60 Hz Tension nominale: jusqu’à 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Bemessungsstrom: max. 10 A Rated current: max. 10 A Courant nominal: max. 10 A
Leitungseinführung ø: Standard Optional Cable entry ø: Standard Optional Entrée de câble ø: Standard Optional
Stecker, Kupplung ø 4-7,5 mm ø7,5-11mm Plug, coupler ø 4-7.5 mm ø7.5-11mm Fiche, Prolongateur ø 4-7,5 mm ø7,5-11mm
Anschlussquerschnitt: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/2,5mm² Terminal cross section: 1x0.75-1.5mm²/2.5mm² Section raccordement: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/2,5mm²
Anschlussleitung Draka ToughCat 7 Cable: Draka ToughCat 7 Cable: Draka ToughCat 7
LSHF-FR 4x2/0,27 MUD LSHF-FR 4x2/0.27 MUD LSHF-FR 4x2/0,27 MUD
Vibrationsfestigkeit nach Vibration resistance acc. Résistance aux vibrations selon
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min2) EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min2) EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min2)
Prüfdrehmomente: Test torques: Couples de serrage testés:
Arretierungsschraube 1,0 Nm Locking screw 1.0 Nm Vis dárrêt 1,0 Nm
Überwurfmutter 2,5 Nm Coupling nut 2.5 Nm Collerette de fixation 2,5 Nm
Druckschraube -ø 4-7,5mm 3,5 Nm Pressure screw -ø 4-7,5mm 3.5 Nm Vis de serrage ø 4-7,5mm 3,5 Nm
Druckschraube -ø7,5-11mm 3,5 Nm Pressure screw -ø7,5-11mm 3.5 Nm Vis de serrage ø7,5-11mm 3,5 Nm
1) die besonderen Bedingungen gemäß Prüfschein 1) observe special requirements accd. certifcation 1) Respecter les précautions particulières selon
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X sind zu beachten. PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X. l'attestation d'examen CE de type PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten! 2) Follow the instructions in the chapter Ínstallation! 2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
Sicherheitshinweise Safety instructions Instructions de sécurité
Vor dem Öffnen der Druckschraube Before opening the pressure screw on Avant de relâcher la vis de pression
am Stecker und Kupplung, ist die the plug and coupler, ensure that it sur la prise et le prolongateur,
Spannungsfreiheit sicherzustellen. has been isolated from the supply. vérifiez l’absence de tension.
Die Montageanleitung darf nur The assembly instructions must be Utilisez la notice de montage
zusammen mit der ausführlichen used in conjunction with the detailed uniquement en association avec les
Betriebsanleitung operating instructions instructions détaillées de service
„GHG5707001P0001“ „GHG5707001P0001” “GHG5707001P0001” (disponibles
(unter www.ceag.de erhältlich) (available from www.ceag.de). sur le site www.ceag.de ).
verwendet werden. The user information for „MOOG- Les informations utilisateur pour
Die Benutzerinformationen für Ventile“ must to be observed les „MOOG-Ventile“ doivent être
„MOOG-Ventile“ sind zu beachten (www.Moog.com/industrial). respectées
(www.Moog.com/industrial). The configuration of plug and socket (www.Moog.com/industrial).
Das Konfektionieren der Steck- systems shall only be carried out by Seul un personnel qualifié est
verbinder darf nur durch Fachkräfte qualified personnel. autorisé à effectuer le branchement
erfolgen. Plug and socket systems of the type électrique des connecteurs mâles-
Die Steckverbindungen eXLink sind eXLink are not suited for use in Zone femelles.
nicht für den Einsatz in der Zone 0 0 or 20 areas. In order to guarantee Les connecteurs mâles-femelles
oder 20 geeignet. Zur Sicherstellung the explosion protection, only inlets eXLink ne conviennent pas pour une
des Explosionsschutzes dürfen in die and flange sockets made of metal utilisation en zone 0 et 20. Afin de
Bohrungen von druckfesten may be fitted in the boreholes of garantir une protection
Gehäusen nur Gerätestecker und flameproof enclosures. antidéflagrante, seuls des socles
Flansch-steckdosen aus Metall The metal flang sockets and inlets connecteurs et des prises de courant
GHG 570 7001 P0101 D/E/F (a)/Auflage/38.11/Str
eingesetzt werden. shall be incorporated in the earth à bride métalliques doivent être
Gerätestecker und Flanschsteck- potential eyualization. montés dans les évidements des
dosen aus Metall sind durch When opened, the live plug and boîtiers à l’épreuve de la pression.
geeignete Maßnahmen in das socket system components shall be Les prises à bride aux métal et les
Erdpotential der Gehäuse bzw. sealed immediately after sockles connecteur aux métal
Geräte mit einzubeziehen. disconnection using the protective doivent être reliés au même
Die unter Spannung stehenden cap. potentiel.
Steckverbindungskomponenten Here it is necessary to ensure that it Après déconnexion, les éléments de
müssen sofort nach dem Trennen is closed correctly, otherwise the connexion encore sous tension
mit der Schutzkappe verschlossen minimum degree of protection and doivent immédiatement être
werden, damit die Schutzart und the explosion protection are no protégés à l’aide d’obturateurs.
damit der Explosionsschutz longer guaranteed.
sichergestellt wird.
Montageanleitung / Mounting instructions / Mode d’emploi
ohne PE-Bügel mit PE-Bügel A
without PE-shackle with PE-shackle
sans étrier de PE avec étrier de PE
Anschlussquerschnitt 0,75 - 1,5mm² oder 2,5mm²

Cross section 0.75 - 1.5mm² or 2.5mm²
Section de raccordement 0,75 - 1,5mm² ou 2,5mm²
Kupplung
Coupler
Prolongateur 6
C
4
(PE -Bügel, nur 4+1)
(PE-clamp, only with 4+1)
(étrier de PE, seulment 4+1)
2
5
3
1
(PE) D
95
28
6h
E 6h
B
Stecker
Plug
Fiche 6
C
(PE -Bügel, nur 4+1) 4
(PE-clamp, only with 4+1)
(étrier de PE, seulment 4+1)
5
D
Ausführung 4-polig (3+PE)

3
= ohne PE-Bügel
1 Version 4-pole (3+PE)

= without PE-clamp
(PE) 6h
Version 4 pôles (3+PE) E
= sans l’étrier de PE
F
2
1h 5h
96 G H
28
6h 10 h
Stecker/Kupplung öffnen Plug open Ouverture de la fiche
1. Eventuell vorhandene Schutzkappe 1. Screw down possible excisting 1. Dévisser le capuchon (si monté) de la
abschrauben. protective cap. . fiche.
2. Arretierschraube lösen. 2. Loosen locking screw. 2. Dévisser la vis d’arrêt.
3. Druckstück aus Hülse herausdrehen. 3. Screw out pressure piece of plug 3. Sortir en la tournant la pièce de
4. Einsatz von vorne aus der Hülse sleeve. pression de la douille de fiche.
herausdrücken. 4. Press out from front plug insert out of 4. Extraire par l’avant le bloc de fiche de la
5. Dabei Zugentlastung, Dichtung, plug sleeve. douille de fiche.
Druckscheibe, Isolierhülse aus Hülse 5. At the same time, remove the strain 5. Retirer pendant cette opération par
nach hinten heraus nehmen. relief, seal, thrust washer and l’arrière la décharge de tension, le joint,
6. Farbring zur Kennzeichnung auf insulating sleeve from the plug sleeve la rondelle de pression, la douille
Hülseaufziehen. from the back. isolante de la douille de fiche.
6. Fit coloured ring used for marking on to 6. Monter la bague en couleur comme
the plug sleeve. repère sur la douille de fiche.
Leiter mit Stiften / Buchsen Connecting conductors to pins Raccordement des conducteurs
verbinden aux contacts mâles/
The insulation of the conductor shall
reach up to the pins. The conductor femelles
Die Isolation des Leiters muss bis an
die Stifte / Buchsen heranreichen. Der must not be damaged. L’isolation du conducteur doit arriver
Leiter darf nicht beschädigt sein. 1. Strip off ca. 30 mm of cable jusqu’aux contacts . Le conducteur ne doit
insulation.(Fig.1) pas être endommagé.
1. Kabel ca. 30 mm abmanteln.(Fig.1) 2. Strip off ca. 8 mm of insulation from 1. Dénuder le câble sur env. 30 mm.(Fig.1)
2. Leiter des Kabels ca. 8 mm ab- cable conductors. 2. Dénuder les conducteurs du câble sur
isolieren. Crimp plugs/contacts env. 8 mm.
Stifte / Buchsen anschließen 1. Insert conductor into the connection Présertir Fiche/Prolongateur
opening of the plug/contact pin.
1. Leiter in die Anschlussöffnung der 1. Enficher le conducteur dans l’ouverture
2. Crimp on all conductors using
Stifte / Buchsen stecken. du contact mâle/femelle.
crimping tool (oAccessories) [Fig.$@
2. Alle Leiter mit der Crimpzange 2. Pré-sertir tous les conducteurs avec
or
(o Zubehör) ancrimpen (Fig.A). la pince à sertir (o accessoire) (Fig.A).
solder all conductors to plug pins/
oder ou
contact and pull shrink-on sleeve
Alle Leiter mit Stiften/Buchsen braser tous les conducteurs avec les
over each solder ring point.
verlöten und contacts mâles/femelles et enfiler la
Schrumpfschlauch über jede Lötstelle Assembling plugs/coupler gaine thermorétractable sur chaque
ziehen. brasure.
Stecker/Kupplung montieren Also assemble plug/coupler pins that
are not connected. Montage de la fiche/du
Auch Stifte/Buchsen montieren, die Once they have been pressed into prolongateur
nicht angeschlossen sind. the plug/coupler insert, the plug pins
Monter aussi les contacts mâles/
Die Stifte/Buchsen sind nach dem cannot be disassembled. femelles non raccordés.
Eindrücken in den Einsatz nicht mehr 1. Push pressure piece, strain relief,
Les contacts mâles/femelles ne
demontierbar. seal and thrust washer on to cable.
peuvent plus être démontés après avoir
1. Druckstück, Zugentlastung, Dichtung 2. The plug/contact pin, Item 4, is larger
in diameter. To avoid mistakes, put été pressés dans le bloc de fiche.
und Druckscheibe auf Kabel
this into the holder first. Push all the 1. Monter la pièce de pression, la décharge
aufschieben.
plug pins into the hexa gonal de tension.
2. Der Stift/die Buchse der Position 4 hat
keyways of the plug/coupler insert 2. Le contact mâle/femelle de la position 4
einen größeren Durchmesser. Diesen
until they engage. a un plus gros diamètre. Pour éviter
zuerst in seine Halterung stecken.
3. Push the insulating sleeve on to the toute confusion, enficher celui-ci en
Alle Stifte / Buchsen bis zum
plug insert. premier dans son support.
hörbaren Einrasten in die Sechskant-
4. Insert the plug insert with guide lug Enfoncer tous les contacts
führung des Einsatzes drücken.
into the keyway of the plug sleeve mâlesfemelles jusqu’à l’enclenchement
3. Isolierhülse auf Einsatz schieben.
(Fig.G). dans le guidage hexagonal du bloc de
4. Einsatz mit Führungsnase in die
5. Fit thrust washer, seal and strain fiche.
Führungs-nut der Hülse stecken
relief. 3. Monter la douille isolante sur le bloc de
(Fig.G).
6. Screw pressure piece tight fiche.
5. Druckscheibe, Dichtung, Zug-
[torque -> Technical Data] 4. Engager le bloc de fiche avec l’ergot de
entlastung montieren.
7. Tighten locking screw (Fig. H). guidage dans la rainure de guidage de la
6. Druckstück (2) festschrauben
douille de fiche (Fig.G).
(Drehmoment -> Technische Daten).
5. Monter la rondelle de pression, le joint,
7. Arretierschraube festschrauben (Fig. H).
la décharge de tension.
6. Visser la pièce de pression (couple ->
Caractéristiques techniques).
7. Visser la vis d’arrêt (Fig. H).
Handhabung Handling Manoeuvre
A/A1 Den Stecker mit der A/A1 Insert the plug into the A/A1 Introduisez la fiche en
Führungsnase lagerichtig in die coupler until they reach the 1st positionnant correctement
entsprechende Führungsnut der stop. Ensure that the position of l’ergot de guidage dans la
Kupplung bis zum 1. Anschlag the key on the plug corresponds rainure de guidage
einstecken (B). to that of the keyway on the correspondante du prolongateur
B1 Danach den Stecker um ca. coupler (B). jusqu’à la 1ère butée (B).
30° nach rechts bis zum B1 Then turn the plug to the right B 1 Ensuite, tournez la fiche
Begrenzungsanschlag drehen. through ca. 30° until it reaches d’environ 30° vers la droite
C Stecker bis zum Endanschlag the stop. jusqu’en butée de limitation.
mit der Kupplung zusammen- C Insert plug into coupler until it C Assemblez la fiche et le
stecken. reaches the final stop. prolongateur jusqu’en butée.
D Überwurfmutter „handfest“ an D Tighten the coupling nut on the D Vissez à fond la collerette de
der gesteckten Steck- connected plug and socket. fixation sur le connecteur
verbindung. enfiché.
A A1
1
1
B B1
2
C 4 D
5
Normenkonformität Conformity with standards Conformité avec les
normes
Das Steckverbindungssystem The plug and socket system is Les boîtes à bornes sont
entspricht den in der Konformitäts- conform to the standards specified conformes aux normes reprises
erklärung aufgeführten Normen in the EC-Declaration of conformity dans la déclaration de conformité
und den vergleichbaren and additional conform to the et supplémentaires conformes à la
IEC Standards comparable IEC Standards comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, I
IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0, IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0, EC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1. IEC 61241-1. IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02 CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02 CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutz- 94/9 EC: Equipment and 94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes
systeme zur bestimmungs- protective systems intended for de protection destinés à être
gemäßen Verwendung in use in potentially explosive utilisés en atmosphère explosible.
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen. atmospheres. Les boîtes à bornes ont été
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist It has been designed, manu- conçues, fabriquées et contrôlées
gemäß DIN EN ISO 9001 entwi- factured and tested according to suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
ckelt, gefertigt und geprüft worden. the state of the art and to
DIN EN ISO 9001.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
Internet: www.CEAG.de
E-Mail: info-ex@ceag.de
eXLink 4-polig Gerätestecker, Flanschsteckdose/
4-pole Inlet, Flange/
C US
4 la prise et le prolongateur

Gerätekennzeichnung Apparatus marking Marquage de l’appareil
nach 94/9/EG: II 2G Ex de IIC T6/ acc. to 94/9/EC: II 2G Ex de IIC T6/ selon 94/9/CE: II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
II 2D tD A21 IP66 T80°C II 2D tD A21 IP66 T80°C II 2D tD A21 IP66 T80°C
EG-Baumusterprüf- EC type examination Attestation d’examen CE
bescheinigung: PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X certificate: PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X de type: PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Anschlussquerschnitt: AWG 22, AWG 26 Terminal cross section: AWG 22, AWG 26 Section raccordement: AWG 22, AWG 26
Anschlussleitung: AWG 22/26 Metrofunk Cable: AWG 22/26 Metrofunk Cable: AWG 22/26 Metrofunk
Prüfdrehmomente Test torques Couples de serrage testés
Arretierungsschraube: 1,0 Nm Locking screw: 1.0 Nm Vis d´ arrêt: 1,0 Nm
Einschraubgewinde Steck- Screw-in thread - flange Filets de vis de prise à
dose, Gerätestecker: 30 Nm socket, inlet: 30 Nm pride, connecteur: 30 Nm
Überwurfmutter: 2,5 Nm (handfest) coupling nut: 2,5 Nm (by hand) Ecrou(Bien serrer à la main): 2,5 Nm
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten! 2) Follow the instructions in the chapter Ínstallation! 2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
Sicherheitshinweise Safety instructions Instructions de sécurité
Vor dem Öffnen der Druckschraube am Before opening the pressure screw on Avant de relâcher la vis de pression sur
Stecker und Kupplung, ist die the plug and coupler, ensure that it has la prise et le prolongateur, vérifiez
Spannungsfreiheit sicherzustellen. been isolated from the supply. l’absence de tension.
Die Montageanleitung darf nur zusam- The assembly instructions must be used Utilisez la notice de montage uniquement
men mit der ausführlichen Betriebsan- in conjunction with the detailed operating en association avec les instructions
leitung „GHG5707001P0001“ (unter instructions “GHG5707001P0001” détaillées de service
www.ceag.de erhältlich) verwendet (available from www.ceag.de). “GHG5707001P0001” (disponibles sur le
werden. site www.ceag.de ).
The user information for
Die Benutzerinformationen für „MOOG- „MOOG-Ventile“ must to be observed. Les informations utilisateur pour les
Ventile“ sind zu beachten (www.Moog.com/industrial). „MOOG-Ventile“ doivent être respectées.
(www.Moog.com/industrial). (www.Moog.com/industrial).
The connection of plug and socket
Das Konfektionieren der Steckverbinder systems shall only be carried out by Seul un personnel qualifié est autorisé à
darf nur durch Fachkräfte erfolgen. qualified personnel. effectuer le branchement électrique des
Die Gewindebohrungen im druckfesten The threaded holes in the flameproof connecteurs mâles-femelles.
Schutzgehäuse oder Einbaugeräten, Les alésages filetés du boîtier de
enclosure shall fulfil the minimum
müssen den Mindestanforderungen der protection ou appareil à encastrer
requirements of EN 60079-1.
EN 60079-1, entsprechen.
Plug and socket systems of the type résistant à la pression doivent satisfaire
Die Steckverbindungen eXLink sind nicht aux exigences minima de la norme
eXLink are not suited for use in
für den Einsatz in der Zone 0 oder 20 EN 60079-1.
zone 0 or 20 areas.
geeignet.
In order to guarantee the explosion Les connecteurs mâles-femelles eXLink ne
Zur Sicherstellung des Explosions- conviennent pas pour une utilisation en
schutzes dürfen in die Bohrungen von
protection, only inlets and flange sockets
made of metal may be fitted in the zone 0 et 20.
druckfesten Gehäusen nur Geräte-
stecker und Flanschsteckdosen aus boreholes of flameproof enclosures. Afin de garantir une protection
Metall eingesetzt werden. The metal flang sockets and inlets shall antidéflagrante, seuls des socles
be incorporated in the earth potential connecteurs et des prises de courant à
GHG 570 7001 P0102 (F)/Auflage in tsd./38.11/Str.
Gerätestecker und Flanschsteckdosen

aus Metall sind durch geeignete eyualization. bride métalliques doivent être montés
Maßnahmen in das Erdpotential der They shall be used for their intended dans les évidements des boîtiers à
Gehäuse bzw. Geräte mit einzubeziehen. purpose and shall be in an undamaged l’épreuve de la pression.
and perfect state. Les prises à bride aux métal et les
Steckverbindung nur in technisch
sockles connecteur aux métal doivent
einwandfreiem Zustand sowie When opened, the live plug and socket
être reliés au même potentiel.
bestimmungsgemäß, sicherheits- und system components shall be sealed
gefahrenbewusst unter Beachtung dieser immediately after disconnection using the N’utilisez les prises de courant à bride et
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung protective cap. socles connecteurs qu’avec les fiches et
montieren und betreiben. prolongateurs correspondants et en
Here it is necessary to ensure that it is
Die unter Spannung stehenden Steck- parfait état.
closed correctly, otherwise the minimum
verbindungskomponenten müssen sofort degree of protection and the explosion Après déconnexion, les éléments de
nach dem Trennen mit der Schutzkappe protection are no longer guaranteed. connexion encore sous tension doivent
verschlossen werden, damit die immédiatement être protégés à l’aide
Schutzart und damit der Explosions- d’obturateurs.
schutz sichergestellt wird.
Handhabung Handling Manoeuvre
A/A1 Den Stecker mit der Führungs- A/A1 Insert the plug into the coupler A/A1 Introduisez la fiche en
nase lagerichtig in die entsprechende until they reach the 1st stop. Ensure positionnant correctement l’ergot de
Führungsnut der Kupplung bis zum 1. that the position of the key on the guidage dans la rainure de guidage
Anschlag einstecken (B). plug corresponds to that of the correspondante du prolongateur
B1 Danach den Stecker um ca. 30° nach keyway on the coupler (B). jusqu’à la 1ère butée (B).
rechts bis zum Begrenzungsanschlag B1 Then turn the plug to the right B 1 Ensuite, tournez la fiche d’environ 30°
drehen. through ca. 30° until it reaches the vers la droite jusqu’en butée de
C Stecker bis zum Endanschlag mit der stop. limitation.
Kupplung zusammenstecken. C Insert plug into coupler until it reaches C Assemblez la fiche et le prolongateur
D Die Überwurfmutter des Steckers über the final stop. jusqu’en butée.
die Kupplung schieben und handfest D Slide the coupling nut of the plug over D Enfiler l´écrou de la prise sur le
festschrauben. the coupler and tighten well by hand prolongateur et bien serrer à la main.
A A1
1
1
B B1
2
C D
4
5
Montage / Mounting / Montage
Gerätestecker mit Anschlussleitung
Inlet with connection leads
Socle connecteuravec lignes de raccordement
13 60 13 74
SW 25
SW 25
M20
M20
28
28
6h
V < 2000 cm³ V > 2000 cm³
Flanschsteckdose mit Anschlussleitung

Flange socket with connection leads
Prise à bride avec lignes de raccordement
1
1h
9 63,5
SW 25
M20
5h
28
10 h
Das Gehäusevolumen bei der Auswahl

des Gerätesteckers berücksichtigen.
Observe the flameproof enclosure Verdrehungsschutz - optional

volume when flange-socket selecting. Anti-torsion protection - optionally
Protection anti-torsion - facultatifement
Observez le volume de l'enceinte
antidéflagrante lors socle
connecteuravec sélection.
Flanschsteckdosen, oder Gerätestecker müssen durch

geeignete Maßnahmen (z.B. Einkleben, Kontern (Prüfdrehmoment 30 Nm) oder
Arretieren mit einem Verdrehungsschutz gegen Verdrehen
oder Selbstlockern gesichert werden.
Suitable measures shall be applied (e.g. adhesive, locking (Test torques 30 Nm) and
retaining with anti-torsion protection) to safeguard screwed-in
flange sockets, inlets or angle pieces against twisting or
self-loosening.
Une fois vissés, les prises à brides ou socles connecteurs
doivent être bloqués par un moyen approprié (par ex. collage,
contre-écrou (Couples de serrage testés 30 Nm) et blocage par protection anti-torsion)
pour les empêcher de tourner ou de se dévisser.
normes
Das Steckverbindungssystem entspricht den in The plug and socket system is conform to the Les boîtes à bornes sont conformes aux normes
der Konformitätserklärung aufgeführten Normen standards specified in the EC-Declaration of reprises dans la déclaration de conformité et
und den vergleichbaren IEC Standards conformity and additional conform to the supplémentaires conformes à la
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7, comparable IEC Standards comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1. IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7, IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02 IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1. IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003 CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung in 94/9 EC: Equipment and protective systems 94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen. intended for use in potentially explosive destinés à être utilisés en atmosphère
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist gemäß atmospheres. explosible.
DIN EN ISO 9001 entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft It has been designed, manufactured and tested Les boîtes à bornes ont été conçues, fabriquées
worden. according to the state of the art and to et contrôlées suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
DIN EN ISO 9001.

Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
eXLink 6+1-polig Stecker, Kupplung/
6+1-pole plug, coupler /
C US
6+1 la fiche, prolongateur

nach 94/9/EG: II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 acc. to 94/9/EC: II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 selon 94/9/CE: II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
temperatur: -25°C/-55°C bis 40°C1) temperature: -25°C/-55°C to +40 °C1) admissible: -25°C/-55°C à +40°C1)
Leitungseinführung ø: Standard Optional Cable entry ø: Standard Optional Entrée de câble ø: Standard Optional
Stecker, Kupplung ø7-11mm ø11-15mm Plug, coupler ø7-11mm ø11-15mm Fiche, Prolongateur ø7-11mm ø11-15mm
Anschlussleitung: LEONI 7x0,75mm², Cable: LEONI 7x0,75mm², Cable: LEONI 7x0,75mm²,
MUD MUD MUD
Anschlussquerschnitt: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/ Terminal cross section: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/ Section raccordement: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/
2,5mm² 2,5mm² 2,5mm²
Prüfdrehmomente: Metall Test torques: Couples de serrage testés:
Arretierungsschraube 1,0 Nm Locking screw 1.0 Nm Vis dárrêt 1,0 Nm
dose, Gerätestecker 3,5 Nm socket, inlet 3.5 Nm pride, connecteur 3,5 Nm
Druckschraube 3,5 Nm Pressure screw 3.5 Nm Vis de serrage 3,5 Nm
Druckschraube 3,5 Nm Pressure screw 3.5 Nm Vis de serrage 3,5 Nm
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten! 2) Follow the instructions in the chapter Ínstallation 2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
Sicherheitshinweise Safety instructions Consignes de sécurité

Zielgruppen dieser Anleitung sind Operations shall be carried out by Ce mode d’emploi s’adresse aux électriciens
Elektrofachkräfte und unterwiesene electricians and suitably personnel trained et personnes initiées sur base de la norme
Personen in Anlehnung an die IEC 60079-14. in hazardous area with knowledge of CEI 60079-14.
Die Montageanleitung nur zusammen mit der increased safety explosion protection in Utilisez la notice de montage uniquement en
ausführlichen Betriebsanleitung accordance with IEC 60079-14. association avec les instructions détaillées de
„GHG5707005P0001“ (unter www.ceag.de The assembly instructions must be used in service “GHG5707005P0001” (disponibles sur le
erhältlich) verwenden. conjunction with the detailed operating site www.ceag.de ).
Die Benutzerinformationen für instructions “GHG5707005P0001” (available from Les informations utilisateur pour les
„MOOG-Ventile“ sind zu beachten www.ceag.de). „MOOG-Ventile“ doivent être respectées
(www.Moog.com/industrial). The user information for „MOOG-Ventile“ (www.Moog.com/industrial).
Die auf den Geräten angegebene must to be observed Le groupe d’explosion et la classe de
Temperaturklasse und Zündschutzart ist zu (www.Moog.com/industrial). température marqués sur les appareils
beachten. The temperature class and explosion group devront être respectés.
Die Steckverbindung ist nicht für den Einsatz marked on the terminal boxes have to be Le connecteur n’est pas conçu pour être
im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich der Zone observed. utilisé dans les atmosphères explosibles des
0 und Zone 20, 21, 22 gemäß EN 60079-10 The plug and socket system is not suitable zones 0 et 20, 21, 22 conformément à
geeignet. for Zone 0 and tone 20, 21, 22 hazardous CEI 60079-10.
Steckverbinder unter Last nur mit den areas accordance with IEC 60079-10. Respecter impérativement les valeurs
Werten der Technischen Daten betreiben. The plug and socket system may only be indiquées dans les caractéristiques
connected or disconnected under load acc. techniques pour les connecteurs sous
Trennen unter Belastung maximal bis charge. Ne séparer qu'à 230 V / 400 V 10 A
230 V / 400 V , 10 A möglich. to technical data. ( 230 V / 400 V max. 10 A)
These assembly and operating instructions Monter et utiliser le connecteur seulement
Steckverbindung nur in technisch s’il présente un état technique parfait,
einwandfreiem Zustand sowie bestimmungs- shall be observed when installing and conformément à sa destination, en étant
gemäß, sicherheits- und gefahrenbewusst operating the plug and socket connector
system. It shall only be used in a technically conscient des risques et des mesures de
unter Beachtung dieser Montage- und sécurité à appliquer dans le respect d es
Betriebsanleitung montieren und betreiben. perfect state and in accordance with the
GHG 570 7005 P0101 D/E/F (a)/Auflage/38.11/Str.
intended purpose while paying attention to présentes instructions de montage et de

Beachten Sie die nationalen Sicherheits- the particular safety and hazard aspects. service.
und Unfallverhütungsvorschriften und die Tenir compte des prescriptions nationales
nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise in The national safety rules and regulations for
en matière de sécurité et de prévention des
dieser Betriebsanleitung, die wie dieser Text the prevention of accidents, as well as the accidents ainsi que des consignes de
in Kursivschrift gefasst sind! safety instructions included in these
operating instructions, that, like this text, sécurité indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi,
are set in italics, shall be observed! écrites en italiques comme ce texte !
1h
Fig. A Fig. B Fig. C
6h
Fig. D Fig. E Fig. F

30°
„klick“
Verwendung/Eigenschaften Use / Properties Utilisation / Propriétés
Die auf den Steckverbindern angegebene The temperature class and type of protection Observez la classe de température et le type
Temperaturklasse und Zündschutzart stated on the apparatus shall be observed. de protection indiqués sur les appareils.
beachten.
The plug and socket system may only be Respecter impérativement les valeurs indiquées
Steckverbindung unter Last nur mit den Werten operated and disconnected under load acc. to dans les caractéristiques techniques lors de
der Technischen Daten betreiben und trennen. the technical data. l’utilisation et du débranchement du connecteur.
Die Verantwortung hinsichtlich bestimmungs- The sole responsibility with respect to the En cas d’utilisation non conforme de ce
gemäßer Verwendung der Steckverbindung unter suitability and proper use of the plug and socket dispositif de connexion, par référence aux
Bezugnahme der in dieser Montage- und systems with regard to the basic requirements conditions de base du présent mode d’emploi
Betriebsanleitung vorhandenen Rahmen- of these instructions (see Technical Data) lies (caractéristiques techniques), l’exploitant en
bedingungen (Technischen Daten) liegt allein with the operator. supporterait seul la responsabilité.
beim Betreiber. Plug and socket systems shall be checked in Contrôler le connecteur avant la mise en service
Keine Veränderungen bzw. Umbauten an der accordance with Section 6 of the named conformément aux instructions mentionnées
Steckverbindung vornehmen. instructions, before being put into use. dans la section 6.
Jede andere Verwendung ist nicht bestimmungs- Modifications or changes to the design of the
gemäß. plug and socket systems are not permitted. Ne pas modifier ou transformer le connecteur.
COOPER Crouse-Hinds übernimmt keine Applications other than described are not Utiliser exclusivement des pièces d’origine du
Haftung für Schäden, die aus nicht bestimmungs- permitted without COOPER CROUSE-HINDS´s fabricant pour les remplacements et réparations.
gemäßer Verwendung entstehen. prior written consent.
Toute autre utilisation s’avère non conforme.
CCH takes no responsibility for damages
COOPER Crouse Hinds décline toute
causedby incorrect use.
responsabilité pour des dommag
Steckverbindung Branchement/Débranchement
Connection/disconnection of
stecken/trennen du connecteur
plug and socket
Die Flanschsteckdosen und Geräte-
stecker nur mit den zugehörigen The flange sockets and inlets shall only N’utiliser les prises de courant à bride
unbeschädigten Steckern und Kupplungen be operated with the associated, et les socles connecteurs qu’avec des
betreiben. undamaged plugs and couplers. fiches et prolongateurs compatibles
intacts.
Auf gleiche Codierung (Uhrzeit) der Attention shall be paid that the coding
Steckverbindung achten. (time setting) of the plugs and sockets is the Veiller à un codage identique (heure) du
same. connecteur.
i Der Winkel zwischen Führungsnase und PE i The time of day is the angle between the i L’angle entre l’ergot de guidage et le
Stift (mit größerem Durchmesser) ergibt die guide lug and the PE pin (larger in diameter). contact mâle PE (d’un plus grand diamètre)
Uhrzeit. (Fig. A) (Fig. A) donne l’heure. (Fig. A)
Steckverbindung stecken Connecting plug and socket
1. Der Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker mit der Branchement du connecteur
1. Insert the plug or inlet with the guide lug in the
Führungsnase lagerichtig in die entsprechende correct position into the respective keyway of 1. Engager dans la bonne position la fiche/le
Führungsnute der Kupplung bzw. Flanschsteck- socle connecteur avec l’ergot de guidage dans
the coupler or flange socket.(Fig. B) la rainure de guidage correspondante du
dose stecken. (Fig. B)
2. Insert until 1st stop is reached.(Fig. C)
2. Bis zum 1. Anschlag zusammenstecken.(Fig. C) prolongateur/de la prise de courant à bride. (Fig. B)
3. Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker gegen Kupplung 3. Turn plug or inlet through ca. 30° in relation
bzw. Flanschsteckdose ca. 30° gegeneinander to the coupler or flange socket until the stop is 2. Brancher les deux éléments jusqu’à la butée 1
reached.(Fig. D) 3. Tourner dans des sens contraires, d’env. 30°,
bis zum Anschlag verdrehen. (Fig. D)
4. Join plug and socket completely.(Fig. E) la fiche/le socle connecteur et le prolongateur/la
4. Steckverbindung vollständig zusammen-
prise de courant à bride jusqu’en butée.(Fig. D)
stecken.(Fig. E)
i Die elektrische Verbindung des Stecksystems
i The electrical connection has now been 4. Le connecteur mâle-femelle boucher tout à
fait. (Fig. E)
made.
ist jetzt hergestellt.
5. Überwurfmutter des Steckers andrücken und
5. Press the coupling nut of the plug on and
screw it tight.
i Le branchement électrique du système de
festschrauben. connexion est maintenant réalisé.
The IP degree of protection and the 5. Appuyer l’écrou-raccord de la fiche et le visser.
IP Schutz und die mechanische Verbindung
mechanical connection are established by
hergestellt.(Fig. F) Le vissage de l’écrou-raccord a pour effet
tightening the coupling nut.(Fig. F)
d’établir la protection IP et la liaison
Steckverbindung trennen mécanique.(Fig. F)
Disconnecting plug and socket
1. Steckverbindung in umgekehrter Reihenfolge Débranchement du connecteur
1. To disconnect plug and socket, carry out the
zum Stecken trennen. 1. Débrancher le connecteur dans l’ordre
above actions in the reverse order.
inverse du branchement.
Bei nicht korrektem Stecken der When opened, the live plug and socket
Les éléments de connexion
Steckverbindungskomponenten ist der system components shall be sealed
conducteurs de tension à l’état ouvert
Explosionsschutz nicht mehr gewährleistet. immediately after disconnection using the
doivent être fermés avec le capuchon dès
protective cap.
le débranchement .
1
5a
2
3 11
4 1
5 2 9
6 4 3
5 11
9
7 6 10
7 7
8 7
8
9 9 8
8
10
1 Arretierschraube 1 Locking screw 1 Vis d’arrêt

2 Druckstück 2 Pressure piece 2 Pièce de pression
3 Zugentlastung 3 Strain relief 3 Décharge de tension
4 Dichtung 4 Seal 4 Joint
5 Druckscheibe 5 Thrust washer 5 Rondelle de pression
5a Druckscheibe mt PE 5a Thrust washer with PE 5a Rondelle de pression avec un pe
6 geteilte Isolierhülse 6 Insulating sleeve divisible 6 Douille isolante
7 Stift / Buchse 7 Plug pins / contact sockets 7 Contact mâle/femelle
8 Einsatz 8 Plug/Coupler insert 8 Bloc de fiche/prolongateur à insérer
9 Hülse 9 Plug/Coupler sleeve 9 Douille de fiche/prolongateur
10 Überwurfmutter 10 Coupling nut 10 Ecrou-raccord
Kupplung Stecker
Coupler Plug
Prolongateur Fiche
105 111
36
36
8h 12 h
Stecker/Kupplung öffnen Plug open (Fig. 7.1) Ouverture de la fiche

1. Eventuell vorhandene Schutzkappe 1. Screw down possible excisting 1. Dévisser le capuchon (si monté) de la
abschrauben. protective cap. . fiche.
2. Arretierschraube (1) lösen. 2. Loosen locking screw (1). 2. Dévisser la vis d’arrêt (1).
3. Druckstück (2) aus Hülse (9) heraus- 3. Screw out pressure piece (2) of plug 3. Sortir en la tournant la pièce de
drehen. sleeve (9). pression (2) de la douille de fiche (9).
4. Einsatz (8) von vorne aus der Hülse (9) 4. Press out from front plug insert (8) out 4. Extraire par l’avant le bloc de fiche (8)
herausdrücken. of plug sleeve (9). de la douille de fiche (9).
5. Dabei Zugentlastung (3), Dichtung (4), 5. At the same time, remove the strain 5. Retirer pendant cette opération par
Druckscheibe (5), Isolierhülse (6) aus relief (3), seal (4), thrust washer (5) l’arrière la décharge de tension (3), le
Hülse (9) nach hinten heraus nehmen. and insulating sleeve (6) from the joint (4), la rondelle de pression (5), la
6. Farbring zur Kennzeichnung auf Hülse plug sleeve (9) from the back. douille isolante (6) de la douille de
(9) aufziehen. 6. Fit coloured ring used for marking on fiche (9).
to the plug sleeve (9). 6. Monter la bague en couleur comme
repère sur la douille de fiche (9).
8 30
Kon
Fig. 1 abisolieren Fig. 2 crimpen Fig. 3 einsetzen Fig. 4 zusammensetzen Fig. 5 Einsatz in Hülse Fig. 6 festschrauben
Leiter mit Stiften / Buchsen Connecting conductors to pins Raccordement des conducteurs
verbinden The insulation of the conductor shall aux contacts mâles/
reach up to the pins. The conductor and the femelles
Die Isolation des Leiters muss bis an die
Stifte / Buchsen heranreichen. Der Leiter isolation must not be damaged.
und die Isolation dürfen nicht beschädigt 1. Strip off ca. 30 mm of cable L’isolation du conducteur doit arriver
sein. jusqu’aux contacts . Le conducteur et
insulation.(Fig.1) isolementne doit pas être endommagé.
2. Strip off ca. 8 mm of insulation from
1. Kabel ca. 30 mm abmanteln.(Fig.1) cable conductors. 1. Dénuder le câble sur env. 30
2. Leiter des Kabels ca. 8 mm ab- mm.(Fig.1)
isolieren. 2. Dénuder les conducteurs du câble sur
Crimp plugs/contacts env. 8 mm.
Stifte / Buchsen anschließen Présertir Fiche/Prolongateur
1. Insert conductor into the connection
1. Leiter in die Anschlussöffnung der opening of the plug/contact pin (7). 1. Enficher le conducteur dans
Stifte / Buchsen (7) stecken. 2. Crimp on all conductors using l’ouverture
2. Alle Leiter mit der Crimpzange crimping tool (oAccessories) [Fig.@ du contact mâle/femelle (7).
(o Zubehör) ancrimpen (Fig.2). or 2. Pré-sertir tous les conducteurs avec
oder solder all conductors to plug pins/ la pince à sertir (o accessoire) (Fig.2).
Alle Leiter mit Stiften/Buchsen contact and pull shrink-on sleeve ou
verlöten und over each solder ring point. braser tous les conducteurs avec les
Schrumpfschlauch über jede Lötstelle contacts mâles/femelles et enfiler la
ziehen. gaine thermorétractable sur chaque
brasure.
Stecker/Kupplung montieren Assembling plugs/coupler Montage de la fiche/du
prolongateur
Auch Stifte/Buchsen montie- Also assemble plug/coupler Monter aussi les contacts
ren, die nicht angeschlossen pins that are not connected. mâles/femelles non raccordés.
sind.
Once they have been pressed Les contacts mâles/femelles ne
Die Stifte/Buchsen sind nach into the plug/coupler insert, the peuvent plus être démontés
dem Eindrücken in den Einsatz plug pins cannot be après avoir été pressés dans le
nicht mehr demontierbar. disassembled. bloc de fiche.
1. Druckstück (2), Zugentlastung 1. Push pressure piece (2), strain 1. Monter la pièce de pression (2),
(3), Dichtung (4) und Druck- relief (3), seal (4) and thrust la décharge de tension (3),
scheibe (5) auf Kabel washer (5) on to cable. 2. Le contact mâle/femelle de la
aufschieben. 2. The plug/contact pin, Item 7, is position 7 a un plus gros
2. Der Stift/die Buchse der Position larger in diameter. To avoid diamètre. Pour éviter toute
7 hat einen größeren Durch- mistakes, put this into the confusion, enficher celui-ci en
messer. Diesen zuerst in seine holder first. Push all the plug premier dans son support.
Halterung stecken. pins (7) into the hexa gonal Enfoncer tous les contacts
Alle Stifte / Buchsen (7) bis zum keyways of the plug/coupler mâlesfemelles (7) jusqu’à
hörbaren Einrasten in die insert until they engage [Fig.3]. l’enclenchement dans le
Sechskantführung des Einsat- 3. Pull the insulating sleeve (6) guidage hexagonal du bloc de
zes (8) drücken (Fig.3). apart and press the fiche (8) (Fig.3).
3. Isolierhülse (6) auseinander conductors together again until 3. Ecarter la douille isolante (6) puis
ziehen und um die Leiter bis they engage [Fig.3]. la comprimer autour des
zum Einrasten wieder zusam- 4. Push the insulating sleeve (6) on conducteurs jusqu’à
mendrücken (Fig.3). to the plug insert (8). l’enclenchement (Fig.3).
4. Isolierhülse (6) auf Einsatz (8) 5. Insert the plug insert (8) with 4. Monter la douille isolante (6) sur le
schieben. guide lug into the keyway of the bloc de fiche (8).
5. Einsatz (8) mit Führungsnase in plug sleeve (9) [Fig.4]. 5. Engager le bloc de fiche (8) avec
die Führungs-nut der Hülse (10) 6. Fit thrust washer (5), seal (4) l’ergot de guidage dans la
stecken (Fig.4). and strain relief (3). rainure de guidage (10) de la
6. Druckscheibe (5), Dichtung (4), 7. Screw pressure piece (2) tight douille de fiche (Fig.4).
Zugentlastung (3) montieren. [torque -> Technical Data] 6. Monter la rondelle de pression
7. Druckstück (2) festschrauben 8. Tighten locking screw (1). (5), le joint (4), la décharge de
(Drehmoment -> Technische tension (3).
Daten). 7. Visser la pièce de pression (2)
8. Arretierschraube (1) (couple -> Caractéristiques
festschrauben. techniques).
8. Visser la vis d’arrêt (1).

normes
Das Steckverbindungssystem The plug and socket system is Les boîtes à bornes sont
entspricht den in der Konformitäts- conform to the standards specified conformes aux normes reprises
erklärung aufgeführten Normen in the EC-Declaration of conformity dans la déclaration de conformité
und den vergleichbaren and additional conform to the et supplémentaires conformes à la
IEC Standards comparable IEC Standards comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, I
IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0, IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0, EC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1. IEC 61241-1. IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutz- 94/9 EC: Equipment and protective 94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes de
systeme zur bestimmungs- systems intended for use in protection destinés à être utilisés
gemäßen Verwendung in potentially explosive atmospheres. en atmosphère explosible.
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen. It has been designed, manu- Les boîtes à bornes ont été
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist factured and tested according to conçues, fabriquées et contrôlées
gemäß DIN EN ISO 9001 entwi- the state of the art and to suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
ckelt, gefertigt und geprüft worden. DIN EN ISO 9001
EG-Konformitätserklärung
EC-Declaration of conformity
CE-Déclaration de conformité
PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
GHG 900 1000 P0048 B
Wir / we / nous Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH

Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die Mehrfachsteckverbindung eXLink 6-/7-polig

hereby declare in our sole responsibility, that the multiple plug and socket systems eXLink, 6-/7-pole
déclarons de notre seule responsabilité, que le multiple fiches et prises eXlLink, à 6-/7-pôles
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 // II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 Typ GHG 57.
auf die sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit den folgenden Normen oder normativen Dokumenten übereinstimmen.
which are the subject of this declaration, are in conformity with the following standards or normative documents.
auquel cette déclaration se rapporte, est conforme aux normes ou aux documents normatifs suivants.
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie Titel und / oder Nr. sowie Ausgabedatum der Norm.
Terms of the directive Title and / or No. and date of issue of the standard.
Prescription de la directive Titre et / ou No. ainsi que date d‘émission des
normes.
94/9/EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur bestimmungs- EN 60 079-0: 2004

gemäßen Verwendung in explosionsgefährdeten EN 60 079-1: 2004
Bereichen. EN 60 079-7: 2004
EN 60 079-11: 2007
94/9/EC: Equipment and protective systems intended for EN 60 529: 1991 + A1: 2000
use in potentially explosive atmospheres. EN 61 984: 2001
EN 60 999-1: 2000
94/9/CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection destinés à
être utilisés en atmosphère explosibles.
2004/108 EG: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit EN 60 947-1: 2007

2004/108 EC: Electromagnetic compatibility
2004/108 CE: Compatibilité électromagnétique
Eberbach, den 17.09.09

i.A. R. Brandel i.V. H. Huter
Ort und Datum Leiter Labor Leiter Approbation
Place and date Head of Laboratory Head of Approval office
Lieu et date Chef du dépt. Laboratoire Chef du dépt. approbation
PTB 96 ATEX Q 1 - 5
Zertifizierungsstelle Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)

Notified Body of the certification Bundesallee 100
Organes Notifié et Compétent D-38116 Braunschweig
Konformitätsbewertungsstelle Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)

Notified Body to quality evaluation Bundesallee 100
Organes d’attestation de conformité D-38116 Braunschweig
Für den Sicheren Betrieb des Betriebsmittels sind die Angaben der zugehörigen Betriebsanleitung zu beachten.
For the safe use of this apparatus, the informations given in the accompanying operating instructions must be followed.
Afin d’assurer le bon fonctionnement de nos appareils, priére de respecter les directives du mode d’emploi correspondent à ceux-ci.

Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
eXLink 6+1-polig Gerätestecker, Flanschsteckdose/
6+1-pole Inlet, Flange/
C US
6+1 la prise et le prolongateur
nach 94/9/EG: II 2G Ex de IIC T6/ acc. to 94/9/EC: II 2G Ex de IIC T6/ selon 94/9/CE: II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
Anschlussleitung: AWG22 Metrofunk Cable: AWG22 Metrofunk Cable: AWG22 Metrofunk
AWG26 Metrofunk AWG26 Metrofunk AWG26 Metrofunk
Anschlussquerschnitt: AWG22, AWG26 Terminal cross section: AWG22, AWG26 Section raccordement: AWG22, AWG26
Prüfdrehmomente: Test torques Couples de serrage testés
Arretierungsschraube: 1,0 Nm Locking screw: 1.0 Nm Vis d´ arrêt: 1,0 Nm
dose, Gerätestecker 30 Nm socket, inlet: 30 Nm pride, connecteur: 30 Nm
Überwurfmutter: 2,5 Nm (handfest) coupling nut: 2,5 Nm (by hand) Ecrou(Bien serrer à la main): 2,5 Nm
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten! 2) Follow the instructions in the chapter Ínstallation 2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
Sicherheitshinweise Safety instructions Consignes de sécurité

Zielgruppen dieser Anleitung sind Operations shall be carried out by Ce mode d’emploi s’adresse aux électriciens
Elektrofachkräfte und unterwiesene electricians and suitably personnel trained et personnes initiées sur base de la norme
Personen in Anlehnung an die in hazardous area with knowledge of CEI 60079-14.
EN/IEC 60079-14. increased safety explosion protection in Utilisez la notice de montage uniquement en
accordance with IEC 60079-14. association avec les instructions détaillées de
Die Montageanleitung nur zusammen mit
The assembly instructions must be used in service “GHG5707005P0001”
der ausführlichen Betriebsanleitung conjunction with the detailed operating (disponibles sur le site www.ceag.de ).
„GHG5707005P0001“ (unter instructions “GHG5707005P0001”
www.ceag.de erhältlich) verwenden. Les informations utilisateur pour les
(available from www.ceag.de).
„MOOG-Ventile“ doivent être respectées.
Die Benutzerinformationen für The user information for „MOOG-Ventile“
„MOOG-Ventile“ sind zu beachten Seul un personnel qualifié est autorisé à
must to be observed.
(www.Moog.com/industrial). effectuer le branchement électrique des
The connection of plug and socket systems connecteurs mâles-femelles.
Das Konfektionieren der Steckverbinder shall only be carried out by qualified Le groupe d’explosion et la classe de
darf nur durch Fachkräfte erfolgen. personnel. température marqués sur les appareils
Die auf den Geräten angegebene The temperature class and explosion group devront être respectés.
Temperaturklasse und Zündschutzart ist marked on the terminal boxes have to be Le connecteur n’est pas conçu pour être
zu beachten. observed.
utilisé dans les atmosphères explosibles des
Die Steckverbindung ist nicht für den The plug and socket system is not suitable zones 0 et 20, 21, 22 conformément à
Einsatz im explosionsgefährdeten for Zone 0 and tone 20, 21, 22 hazardous CEI 60079-10.
Bereich der Zone 0 und Zone 20, 21, 22 areas accordance with EN 60079-10. Respecter impérativement les valeurs
gemäß EN60079-10 geeignet. The plug and socket system may only be indiquées dans les caractéristiques
Steckverbinder unter Last nur mit den connected or disconnected under load acc. techniques pour les connecteurs sous
Werten der Technischen Daten betreiben. to technical data. (230 V / 400 V max. 10 A). charge. Ne séparer qu'à 230 V / 400 V 10 A.
The metal flang sockets and inlets shall be
Trennen unter Belastung maximal bis incorporated in the earth potential Les prises à bride aux métal et les sockles
230 V / 400 V , 10 A möglich. eyualization. connecteur aux métal doivent être reliés au
même potentiel.
GHG 570 7005 P0102 D/E/F (b)/Auflage/38.11/Ziegler
Gerätestecker und Flanschsteckdosen These assembly and operating instructions

shall be observed when installing and Monter et utiliser le connecteur seulement
aus Metall sind durch geeignete
operating the plug and socket connector s’il présente un état technique parfait,
Maßnahmen in das Erdpotential der
conformément à sa destination, en étant
Gehäuse bzw. Geräte mit einzubeziehen. system. It shall only be used in a technically
perfect state and in accordance with the conscient des risques et des mesures de
Steckverbindung nur in technisch
intended purpose while paying attention to sécurité à appliquer dans le respect d es
einwandfreiem Zustand sowie
the particular safety and hazard aspects. présentes instructions de montage et de
bestimmungsgemäß, sicherheits- und
service.
gefahrenbewusst unter Beachtung dieser The national safety rules and regulations for Tenir compte des prescriptions nationales
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung the prevention of accidents, as well as the
en matière de sécurité et de prévention des
montieren und betreiben. safety instructions included in these
accidents ainsi que des consignes de
Die unter Spannung stehenden Steck- operating instructions, that, like this text,
sécurité indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi,
verbindungskomponenten müssen sofort are set in italics, shall be observed! écrites en italiques comme ce texte!
nach dem Trennen mit der Schutzkappe Here it is necessary to ensure that it is
verschlossen werden, damit die closed correctly, otherwise the minimum Après déconnexion, les éléments de
Schutzart und damit der Explosions- degree of protection and the explosion connexion encore sous tension doivent
schutz sichergestellt wird. protection are no longer guaranteed. immédiatement être protégés à l’aide
d’obturateurs.
1h
Fig. A Fig. B Fig. C
6h
Fig. D Fig. E Fig. F

30°
„klick“
Steckverbindung Connection/disconnection of Branchement/Débranchement

stecken/trennen plug and socket du connecteur
Die Flanschsteckdosen und Geräte- The flange sockets and inlets shall only N’utiliser les prises de courant à bride
stecker nur mit den zugehörigen be operated with the associated, et les socles connecteurs qu’avec des
unbeschädigten Steckern und Kupplungen undamaged plugs and couplers. fiches et prolongateurs compatibles
betreiben. intacts.
Attention shall be paid that the coding Veiller à un codage identique (heure) du
Auf gleiche Codierung (Uhrzeit) der (time setting) of the plugs and sockets is the connecteur.
Steckverbindung achten.
i
same.
i Der Winkel zwischen Führungsnase und PE i The time of day is the angle between the
L’angle entre l’ergot de guidage et le
contact mâle PE (d’un plus grand diamètre)
Stift (mit größerem Durchmesser) ergibt die guide lug and the PE pin (larger in diameter). donne l’heure. (Fig. A)
Uhrzeit. (Fig. A) (Fig. A)
Steckverbindung stecken Connecting plug and socket Branchement du connecteur
1. Der Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker mit der 1. Insert the plug or inlet with the guide lug in the 1. Engager dans la bonne position la fiche/le
Führungsnase lagerichtig in die entsprechende correct position into the respective keyway of socle connecteur avec l’ergot de guidage dans
Führungsnute der Kupplung bzw. Flanschsteck- la rainure de guidage correspondante du
the coupler or flange socket.(Fig. B)
dose stecken. (Fig. B) prolongateur/de la prise de courant à bride. (Fig. B)
2. Bis zum 1. Anschlag zusammenstecken.(Fig. C) 2. Insert until 1st stop is reached.(Fig. C)
3. Turn plug or inlet through ca. 30° in relation 2. Brancher les deux éléments jusqu’à la butée 1
3. Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker gegen Kupplung
to the coupler or flange socket until the stop is 3. Tourner dans des sens contraires, d’env. 30°,
bzw. Flanschsteckdose ca. 30° gegeneinander
reached.(Fig. D) la fiche/le socle connecteur et le prolongateur/la
bis zum Anschlag verdrehen. (Fig. D)
4. Join plug and socket completely.(Fig. E) prise de courant à bride jusqu’en butée.(Fig. D)
4. Steckverbindung vollständig zusammen-
i
4. Le connecteur mâle-femelle boucher tout à
stecken.(Fig. E)
The electrical connection has now been fait.(Fig. E)
i Die elektrische Verbindung des Stecksystems
ist jetzt hergestellt.
5. Überwurfmutter des Steckers andrücken und
made.
5. Press the coupling nut of the plug on and i Le branchement électrique du système de
screw it tight by hand. connexion est maintenant réalisé.
handfest festschrauben. 5. Appuyer l’écrou-raccord de la fiche et le visser.
The IP degree of protection and the
IP Schutz und die mechanische Verbindung (Bien serrer à la main).
mechanical connection are established by
hergestellt.(Fig. F) tightening the coupling nut.(Fig. F) Le vissage de l’écrou-raccord a pour effet
d’établir la protection IP et la liaison
Steckverbindung trennen Disconnecting plug and socket mécanique.(Fig. F)
1. Steckverbindung in umgekehrter Reihenfolge
zum Stecken trennen. 1. To disconnect plug and socket, carry out the Débranchement du connecteur
above actions in the reverse order.
Bei nicht korrektem Stecken der 1. Débrancher le connecteur dans l’ordre
Steckverbindungskomponenten ist der When opened, the live plug and socket inverse du branchement.
Explosionsschutz nicht mehr gewährleistet. system components shall be sealed
immediately after disconnection using the Les éléments de connexion
protective cap. conducteurs de tension à l’état ouvert
doivent être fermés avec le capuchon dès
le débranchement .
Anschlussleiter von Prepare connection conductors Préparation conducteurs de

Gerätestecker/Flanschsteckdose of inlet / flange socket raccordement
vorbereiten du socle connecteur / de la prise
Only use cables and conductors specified in the de courant à bride
Kabel und Leiter entsprechend den Technischen Technical Data.
Utiliser les câbles et les conducteurs
Daten verwenden. conformément aux Caractéristiques techniques.
With multi-wire or fine-wire connection leads,
Bei mehr- oder feindrähtigen Leitern die Enden
the ends of the wires shall be treated in Avec des conducteurs multifilaires ou à fils
entsprechend den geltenden nationalen und accordance with the valid national or international
internationalen Vorschriften behandeln (z.B. regulations (e.g. the use of wire-end ferrules). fins, traiter les extrémités conformément aux
Verwenden von Aderendhülsen). The insulation of the conductor shall reach up to directives nationales et internationales (par ex.
en utilisant des embouts).
Die ordnungsgemäß abisolierten Leiter des the plug pins. The conductor must not be
Kabels unter Berücksichtigung einschlägiger damaged Raccorder les conducteurs correctement isolés
Vorschriften anschließen. The relevant regulations shall be observed to du câble en respectant les directives
ensure that the conductors of the cable are correspondantes.
Leiteranschluss zur Aufrechterhaltung der
stripped off correctly.
Zündschutzart mit besonderer Sorgfalt Effectuer le raccordement du conducteur avec
The conductors shall be connected with due care
durchführen. beaucoup de soin pour garantir la protection
to ensure that the degree of protection is
maintained. contre les explosions.
Gerätestecker / Flanschsteckdose Screw in inlet / flange socket Vissage du connecteur / de la prise de
einschrauben courant à bride
Inlets or flange sockets shall only be built into
Gerätestecker bzw. Flanschsteckdose nur in die enclosures intended for this purpose. Ne monter le socle connecteur ou la prise de
dafür vorgesehene Gehäuse einbauen. Observe the flameproof enclosure volume when courant à bride que dans les boîtiers prévus à cet
Das Gehäusevolumen bei der Auswahl des flange-socket selecting. effet.Observez le volume de l'enceinte
Gerätesteckers berücksichtigen. antidéflagrante lors socle connecteuravec
The threaded holes in the flameproof sélection.
Die Gewindebohrungen im druckfesten
enclosure shall fulfil the minimum Les alésages filetés du boîtier de
Schutzgehäuse oder Einbaugeräten, requirements of EN 60079-1.
müssen den Mindestanforderungen der protection ou appareil à encastrer résistant
EN 60079-1, entsprechen. To ensure the explosion protection, only à la pression doivent satisfaire aux
exigences minima de la norme EN 60079-1.
Zur Sicherstellung des Explosions- fit inlets and flange sockets made of metal
in the appropriate type of protection into Pour garantir la protection contre les
schutzes in die Bohrungen von druckfesten the threaded holes of flameproof
Gehäusen nur Gerätestecker und explosions, n’utiliser dans les orifices des
enclosures. boîtiers résistant à la pression que des
Flanschsteckdosen aus Metall mit der
geeigneten Zündschutzart verwenden. socles connecteurs et des prises de courant
The screw-in thread must not be dirty or damaged. à bride en métal, présentant le type de
Die Einschraubgewinde dürfen nicht verschmutz oder
beschädigt sein. protection contre les explosions approprié.
Only use the seal inserts provided in the inlet or
Les filetages ne doivent pas être sales ou
Nur die im Gerätestecker bzw. in der Flanschsteck- flange socket.
endommagés.
dose vorhandenen Dichteinsätze verwenden.
When screwing in the inlet or flange socket, pay N’utiliser que les éléments d’étanchéité disponibles
Beim Einschrauben der Gerätestecker bzw. der attention to the connected conductors to ensure dans le socle connecteur ou la prise de courant
Flanschsteckdosen auf die angeschlossenen that the insulation is not damaged in the à bride.
Leitungen bzw. Adern achten, damit keine process.
Beschädigung der Isolation durch das En vissant le socle connecteur ou la prise de courant
Einschrauben entsteht. à bride sur le câble ou le fil connecté, veiller à
The screw-in components shall be ne pas endommager l’isolation.
Die Einschraubkomponenten sind so
fest einzuschrauben, dass eine korrekte tightened down in such a way that they are Les éléments de vissage doivent être
Dichtwirkung gewährleistet ist. (Prüf- properly sealed (see Technical Data for test vissés avec un couple assurant une bonne
drehmoment siehe Technische Daten). torque). étanchéité. (Couples de contrôle voir les
Caractéristiques techniques)
Die Gerätestecker und Flanschsteckdosen aus The inlets and flange sockets shall be
Intégrer les socles connecteurs et les prises de
Metall in das Erdpotential mit einbeziehen. incorporated in the earth potential.
courant à bride en métal dans le potentiel terrestre.
Vor dem Stecken sicherstellen, dass Gerätestecker Before use, ensure that inlets and flange sockets are Avant la connexion, s’assurer que les socles
und Flanschsteckdosen nicht beschädigt sind. not damaged. connecteurs et les prises de courant à bride
sont en bon état.
1. Gerätestecker bzw. Flanschsteckdose mit 1 Fit inlet or flange socket with anti-twist 1. Visser le socle connecteur ou la prise de courant à
Verdrehschutz einschrauben (Prüf- protection, (test torque -> Technical Data). bride avec la protection antitorsion (Couples de
drehmoment -> Technische Daten). 2. Tighten anti-twist screw. contrôle -> Caractéristiques techniques).
2. Verdrehschutzschraube festdrehen. 3. Fit inlet or flange socket with anti-twist 2. Serrer à fond la vis de protection antitorsion.
3. Gerätestecker bzw. Flanschsteckdosen durch protection (7), (test torque -> Technical Data). 3. Bloquer le socle connecteur ou la prise de
kontern sichern. courant à bride par contre-écrou.
Den Gerätestecker nicht durch verkleben Ne pas coller le socle connecteur pour
gegen Lösen sichern, da sonst Funktionsstö- l’empêcher de se desserrer, cela risquerait
rungen auftreten können. d’entraîner des dysfonctionnements.
Gerätestecker mit Anschlussleitung Flanschsteckdose mit Anschlussleitung

Inlet with connection leads Flange socket with connection leads
Socle connecteuravec lignes de raccordement Prise à bride avec lignes de raccordement
12,5 66 12,5 76 12,5 67
SW 32
SW 32
SW 32
M25
M25
M25
36
36
36
8h 12 h
V < 2000 cm³ V > 2000 cm³
Das Gehäusevolumen bei der Auswahl

des Gerätesteckers berücksichtigen.
Observe the flameproof enclosure
volume when flange-socket selecting.
Observez le volume de l'enceinte
antidéflagrante lors socle
connecteuravec sélection.
1 Überwurfmutter 4 Gerätestecker-Einsatz
Ecrou-raccord Bloc de socle connecteur
Ecrou-raccord Bloc de socle connecteur
2 Gerätestecker-Hülse 5 Flanschsteckdosen Hülse
Douille du socle connecteur Douille de la prise de courant à bride
Douille du socle connecteur Douille de la prise de courant à bride
3 Anschlusskabel 6 Flanschsteckdosen-Einsatz
Câble de raccordement Bloc de prise de courant à bride
Câble de raccordement Bloc de prise de courant à bride
normes
Das Steckverbindungssystem entspricht den in The plug and socket system is conform to the Les boîtes à bornes sont conformes aux normes
der Konformitätserklärung aufgeführten Normen standards specified in the EC-Declaration of reprises dans la déclaration de conformité et
und den vergleichbaren IEC Standards conformity and additional conform to the supplémentaires conformes à la
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7, comparable IEC Standards comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1. IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7, IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02 IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1. IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003 CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07 CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung in 94/9 EC: Equipment and protective systems 94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen. intended for use in potentially explosive destinés à être utilisés en atmosphère
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist gemäß atmospheres. explosible.
DIN EN ISO 9001 entwickelt, gefertigt und It has been designed, manufactured and tested Les boîtes à bornes ont été conçues, fabriquées
geprüft worden. according to the state of the art and to et contrôlées suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
DIN EN ISO 9001.
EG-Konformitätserklärung
EC-Declaration of conformity
CE-Déclaration de conformité
PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
GHG 900 1000 P0048 B
Wir / we / nous Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH

Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die Mehrfachsteckverbindung eXLink 6-/7-polig

hereby declare in our sole responsibility, that the multiple plug and socket systems eXLink, 6-/7-pole
déclarons de notre seule responsabilité, que le multiple fiches et prises eXlLink, à 6-/7-pôles
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 // II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 Typ GHG 57.
auf die sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit den folgenden Normen oder normativen Dokumenten übereinstimmen.
which are the subject of this declaration, are in conformity with the following standards or normative documents.
auquel cette déclaration se rapporte, est conforme aux normes ou aux documents normatifs suivants.
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie Titel und / oder Nr. sowie Ausgabedatum der Norm.
Terms of the directive Title and / or No. and date of issue of the standard.
Prescription de la directive Titre et / ou No. ainsi que date d‘émission des
normes.
94/9/EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur bestimmungs- EN 60 079-0: 2004

gemäßen Verwendung in explosionsgefährdeten EN 60 079-1: 2004
Bereichen. EN 60 079-7: 2004
EN 60 079-11: 2007
94/9/EC: Equipment and protective systems intended for EN 60 529: 1991 + A1: 2000
use in potentially explosive atmospheres. EN 61 984: 2001
EN 60 999-1: 2000
94/9/CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection destinés à
être utilisés en atmosphère explosibles.
2004/108 EG: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit EN 60 947-1: 2007

2004/108 EC: Electromagnetic compatibility
2004/108 CE: Compatibilité électromagnétique
Eberbach, den 17.09.09

i.A. R. Brandel i.V. H. Huter
Ort und Datum Leiter Labor Leiter Approbation
Place and date Head of Laboratory Head of Approval office
Lieu et date Chef du dépt. Laboratoire Chef du dépt. approbation
PTB 96 ATEX Q 1 - 5
Zertifizierungsstelle Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)

Notified Body of the certification Bundesallee 100
Organes Notifié et Compétent D-38116 Braunschweig
Konformitätsbewertungsstelle Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)

Notified Body to quality evaluation Bundesallee 100
Organes d’attestation de conformité D-38116 Braunschweig
Für den Sicheren Betrieb des Betriebsmittels sind die Angaben der zugehörigen Betriebsanleitung zu beachten.
For the safe use of this apparatus, the informations given in the accompanying operating instructions must be followed.
Afin d’assurer le bon fonctionnement de nos appareils, priére de respecter les directives du mode d’emploi correspondent à ceux-ci.

Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK.
Moog designs a range of products that complement the performance of those
featured in this document. Visit our website for more information and the Moog
facility nearest you.
Argentina India Singapore

+54 11 4326 5916 +91 80 4057 6605 +65 677 36238
info.argentina@moog.com info.india@moog.com info.singapore@moog.com
Australia Ireland South Africa

+61 3 9561 6044 +353 21 451 9000 +27 12 653 6768
info.australia@moog.com info.ireland@moog.com info.southafrica@moog.com
Brazil Italy Spain

+55 11 3572 0400 +39 0332 421 111 +34 902 133 240
info.brazil@moog.com info.italy@moog.com info.spain@moog.com
Canada Japan Sweden

+1 716 652 2000 +81 46 355 3767 +46 31 680 060
info.canada@moog.com info.japan@moog.com info.sweden@moog.com
China Korea Switzerland

+86 21 2893 1600 +82 31 764 6711 +41 71 394 5010
info.china@moog.com info.korea@moog.com info.switzerland@moog.com
Finland Luxembourg United Kingdom

+358 10 422 1840 +352 40 46 401 +44 168 429 6600
info.finland@moog.com info.luxembourg@moog.com info.uk@moog.com
France The Netherlands USA

+33 1 4560 7000 +31 252 462 000 +1 716 652 2000
info.france@moog.com info.thenetherlands@moog.com info.usa@moog.com
Germany Norway
+49 7031 622 0 +47 6494 1948
info.germany@moog.com info.norway@moog.com
Hong Kong Russia

+852 2 635 3200 +7 8 31 713 1811
info.hongkong@moog.com info.russia@moog.com
www.moog.com/industrial
Moog is registered trademark of Moog Inc. and its subsidiaries. All trademarks as
indicated herein are the property of Moog Inc. and its subsidiaries.
© 2010 Moog GmbH. All rights reserved. All changes reserved.
Moog Literature Name

Rev. -, May 2012, CDS29577-en
WHAT MOVES YOUR WORLD

Moog Valves D637K - D639K Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Moog Valves D637K - D639K Manual en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Moog Valves D637K - D639K Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What are some of the standards mentioned in the document?

What are some of the standards mentioned in the document?

USER MANUAL FOR

Rev. -, May 2012

SERVO AND PROPORTIONAL VALVES FOR ELECTROHYDRAULIC

All rights reserved.

Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages.

Subject to change without notice.

1 General Information ..................................................................................1

3.2.3 Fail-safe events ............................................................................................................ 27

5 Transportation and Storage ...................................................................58

6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System............................61

7 Electrical connection ..............................................................................68

7.13.2 Typical values for copper cables ................................................................................ 105

11 Technical Data .......................................................................................164

12 Accessories and spare parts................................................................173

13 Ordering Information ............................................................................176

15.2.3 Profibus fundamentals................................................................................................ 192

Fig. 36: SSI transducer connector X2 (6+PE-pin) ........................................................................................ 83

1.1 Notes on user manual

Special models of the valves custom-made for specific customers,

This user manual is also available in German.

1.1.1 Subject to change without notice and validity

1.1.3 Storage location

1.1.4 Typographical conventions

 Identifies an action that must be taken

 Identifies references to another chapter, another table or figure

"…" Denotes headings to the chapters or titles of the documents

Blue text Identifies hyperlinks

1., 2., … Identifies steps in a procedure that must be performed in

1.1.5 Structure of the warning notes

• Warning symbol: draws attention to the danger Explanation structure

- Meaning of the signal words:

1.2 Supplemental documents

The following supplemental documents are available:

1.3 Intended operation

Identification of type series D637K-R/D639K-R:

Tab. 1: Identification D637K-R/D639K-R

Identification type series D637K-P/D639K-P:

Tab. 2: Identification D637K-P/D639K-P

The valves may only be operated as a component part of a higher-level overall

1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel

Maintenance work by the user on explosion proof valves is not

1.5 Structural modifications

1.6 Environmental protection

Generally speaking, the valves do not generate harmful acoustical emissions

1.8 Warranty and liability

1.9 Declaration of conformity

1.10 Registered marks and trademarks

2.1 Handling in accordance with safety

2.2 Occupational safety and health

2.3 General safety instructions

This user manual and the product-related hardware and software

2.5 Pressure limitation

3.1 Function and mode of operation

3.1.1 Operational modes

Series Operational modes: